&u,„^* sfc* /r./rri 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 ^.LIBRARY OF CONGRESS.* 
 
 !|kaf5$| wigW | I 
 
 I UNITED STATES Of AMERICA, f 
 
 f 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 GREEK LANGUAGE ; 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 AN OUTLINE OF THE GRAMMAR, WITH 
 APPROPRIATE EXERCISES, 
 
 FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND PRIVATE LEARNERS. 
 
 BY ASAHEL C. EENDRICK, 
 
 PROFESSOR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE, IN THE 
 HAMILTON LITERARY AND THEOLOGICAL INSTITUTION. 
 
 UTICA: 
 
 BENNETT, BACKUS, & HAWLEY, FRANKLIN SQUARE. 
 
 1S43. 
 

 3 
 
 \*« 
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress, 
 
 By Bennett, Backus, & Hawley, 
 
 i the Clerk's Office of the Northern District of New York. 
 
 in ihe year 1841, 
 
 1 ^ 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 In preparing the little work which is here offered to the 
 public, the author had more immediate reference to the wants 
 of the Institution with which he is connected. An experience 
 of more than ten years, as an instructor in the Greek lan- 
 guage, had led him deeply to feel the need of some work which 
 should render accessible to his own pupils, and to American 
 students generally, the latest and most improved views in 
 this department of Greek Philology. In no field of investi- 
 gation, perhaps, have the last fifty years witnessed more dili- 
 gent and successful labors than in that of the Greek Gram- 
 mar. Many useless and cumbrous theories have been explo- 
 ded, and much light been shed upon the structure and philos- 
 ophy of this noble tongue. That the beginner in Greek should 
 be able to avail himself of these improvements — that they 
 should be admitted, as soon as they are fully shown to be 
 improvements, into our systems of elementary instruction, is 
 obviously desirable. In a study so extensive as the Greek, 
 and which, at best, must consume no small amount of time, 
 it is important that the student be led to his object by the most 
 direct and improved route. He should have all the aids which 
 the most thorough scholarship can afford him. The true 
 principles of the language should be at once presented, in a 
 plain and familiar manner, and he required to learn nothing 
 which he will be obliged to discard at a subsequent stage of 
 his progress as cumbersome and erroneous — nothing which 
 is not the result — and will not therefore stand the test, of the 
 most profound and searching investigation. 
 
True, no judicious instructor will endeavor to teach the 
 philosophy of a language, in advance of the facts. But he 
 will feel the importance of making all his statements and 
 modes of representation harmonize perfectly with the most 
 enlightened philosophical views of the subject. He will, at 
 all events, not present, on the ground of practical conven- 
 ience, any instructions which he is himself aware that the 
 student, on contemplating them from a higher point of view, 
 will instantly reject as artificial, useless, and false. Indeed, 
 among the most mischievous of the errors which more or less 
 prevail in our systems of elementary instruction, is the sepa- 
 ration which is so often made between what is correct in the- 
 ory and what is convenient in practice. We meet, not un- 
 frequently in books prepared for schools, the remark, that, 
 such and such modes of exhibiting the subject are not indeed 
 correct in theory, but are adopted as being practically con- 
 venient. Statements like this the writer believes to be wholly 
 founded in mistake. One of the best tests of the correctness 
 of a theory is, its susceptibility of being reduced to practice; 
 and that is unquestionably the best and soundest theory which 
 is found most convenient and efficient in practice. The wri- 
 ter's own experience has certainly borne ample testimony to 
 the correctness of these views. He has found that in propor- 
 tion as his elementary instructions were thoroughly analyti- 
 cal and searching, and developed in fact, if not in form, the 
 philosophy of the language, his pupils have evinced the deep- 
 est interest, and made the most rapid progress. 
 
 The above remarks are designed to apply more particularly 
 lo the Greek verb. The old mode of splitting it up into a 
 large number of conjugations, artificially distinguished, and 
 Still more of forming the tenses from each other by a circuit- 
 ous process, ha 3 done much to embarrass the progress of the 
 student, and to obscure the beauty and destroy the symmetry 
 
of one of the noblest structures in the whole compass of human 
 language. The writer is happy in knowing that sounder 
 views on this subject are rapidly spreading, as the labors of 
 the best German grammarians, Thiersch, Rost, Buttmann, 
 Kiihner, &c, are becoming better known among us. The 
 recent grammar of Mr. Sophicles is, in this, as in other re- 
 spects, a valuable contribution to the cause of Greek Philol- 
 ogy ; and the author cherishes the hope that the time is not 
 far distant when all the senseless jargon which has so long 
 encumbered and disgraced our Grammars, in regard to the 
 formation of the tenses, will be consigned to merited oblivion. 
 
 In the present work, an attempt is made to aid this object, 
 and to assist American students in obtaining correct views on 
 the leading points of Greek Grammar. How far the author 
 has succeeded, a judicious public will judge. He would 
 invite particular attention to his development of the third 
 declension. It is, in some respects, new, and the writer in- 
 dulges the hope that it will be found superior in simplicity 
 and completeness to the methods adopted in our ordinary 
 Grammars. The verb, also, has been treated with as much 
 fullness as the nature of the work admitted. The subjects 
 of the Argument, and of the nature and import of the moods 
 and tenses, will, it is hoped, be found to be cleared of some 
 difficulties with which they are encumbered in the ordinary 
 mode of treatment. Those who object to the partially new 
 nomenclature here adopted, will, it is hoped, find this no seri- 
 ous objection to their using the work. A half an hour spent 
 in explanation to their pupils will obviate any difficulty ari- 
 sing from this source. The author has not introduced new 
 names of tenses from any spirit of innovation, but from a deep 
 conviction that the existing nomenclature is extremely defect- 
 ive, and, in some cases, erroneous. He would at least, 
 recommend that the names Imperfect Present and Past, and 
 
6 
 
 Perfect Present and Past, and, in the Passive, Perfect Future 
 should be substituted for the common designations of these 
 tenses, as tending to give the student clear and correct impres- 
 sions of their nature, and save much labor in the department 
 of syntax. Special pains have been taken in tracing out the 
 various meanings of the prepositions, and in rendering the 
 vocabulary accurate, and as full as the limits of the work 
 allowed. 
 
 The author may be permitted to say, that the leading prin- 
 ciples of the Greek Grammar are here presented substantially 
 in the manner in which he has for years taught them to his 
 pupils. His custom is to go very slowJy over the difFerent 
 topics as they come up, delaying upon each until the student 
 is perfectly master of it. In regard to the verb, especially, 
 the object at which he uniformly aims, is, to give each mem- 
 ber of a class such perfect command of it, as that he can go 
 through an entire verb, inflecting every part without mistake 
 or hesitation. And this object he has generally found himself 
 able to accomplish. Every student, of moderate abilities, 
 in the course of a few weeks, becomes able to give the inflec- 
 tions of the verb in all its voices, moods, and tenses, in the 
 space of from five to ten minutes, stating or indicating every 
 deviation from the regular forms. No exercise, to which the 
 author subjects his pupils, has been found more profitable 
 than this. They acquire by it such a mastery over the verb 
 in all its parts, as greatly to facilitate their subsequent pro- 
 gress. 
 
 It may be thought, perhaps, that the exercises in this book 
 are not sufficiently numerous. Many more might have been 
 added, but even then but a small number could have been 
 given in comparison with those which every experienced and 
 faithful teacher will give orally to his pupils. The writer 
 
would recommend that every instructor should add to the 
 exercises here given, by taking the same words and throwing 
 them into new combinations. These exercises should for a 
 long time be of a very simple character, those words being 
 chiefly employed with which the pupil is familiar. The use 
 of the article, the adjective, the pronoun, &c, should be thus 
 illustrated by familiar examples, and sufficiently copious on 
 each head, to render the impression distinct and indelible. 
 
 If the author may be permitted to advert to his own expe- 
 rience as a teacher in Greek, he would express his conviction 
 that the secret of success here is to go slowly over the ele- 
 ments, and attend to only one thing at a time. To dwell on 
 each topic until the pupil has perfectly mastered it, is the 
 way to make his acquisitions profitable, and his subsequent 
 progress easy, rapid, and delightful. He will not then feel 
 that the region he has passed over swarms with enemies no 
 less numerous and formidable than those he has yet to encoun- 
 ter. He will not have the difficulties magnified by being 
 seen through the mists of imperfect, half-formed ideas. On 
 the contrary, he will contemplate with pleasure all the ground 
 which he has hitherto gone over. Every victory that he has 
 achieved will prove a stimulant to renewed and augmented 
 exertion ; he will advance with constantly accelerated pace, 
 and will feel, at every step, the toils of study repaid by the 
 delights of perfect knowledge. Let, then, the teacher dismiss 
 all anxiety to conduct his pupils, within a given time, over a 
 wide surface. Let him estimate their progress rather, by the 
 depth to which they have descended — the accuracy and thor- 
 oughness of their knowledge, than by the number of topics to 
 which they have given a superficial attention. Let the stu- 
 dent be content, especially in the commencement of his course, 
 to hasten slowly — to dig deep, and to lay the foundation of 
 his edifice on a rock. He will find his labor amply reward- 
 
8 
 
 ed, not only by its firmness and durability, but by the rapidity 
 with which it is reared. The writer, on this point, speaks 
 with knowledge. He has tried repeatedly the thorough meth- 
 od, and he has found it attended by results as satisfactory as 
 they were unexpected. He believes, firmly, that by carrying 
 out faithfully the principles here inculcated, a judicious teach- 
 er might, in the course of a single year, give his pupils a 
 more extensive and radical acquaintance with the principles 
 of the Greek language than is possessed by the majority of 
 College students at the period of their graduation. 
 
 In conclusion, the writer would express his ardent desire 
 that the present little work may contribute to the advance- 
 ment of Greek learning in this country. That it is faultless, 
 he has not the vanity to suppose; and, indeed, the examina- 
 tion of the sheets, as they have issued from the press, has 
 suggested to him many improvements, which he would be 
 happy if a second edition should give him the opportunity of 
 making. The fact of its having issued from the Cambridge 
 press, would be a sufficient guarantee for the general accu- 
 racy, neatness, and elegance of its execution ; and the author 
 has taken much pains to have it go before the public as free 
 from errors as possible. 
 
 Hamilton, June 9, 1841. 
 
INTRODUCTION 
 
 TO THE 
 
 STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 § 
 
 1. THE ALPHABET. 
 
 The Greek Alphabet consists of twenty-four 
 
 letters, viz. 
 
 
 
 A a 
 
 3 AXcpa 
 
 Mpha a 
 
 B 6 
 
 BrJTa 
 
 Beta b 
 
 r rr 
 
 Ed^ia 
 
 Gamma g hard 
 
 A 8 
 
 AiXra 
 
 Delta d 
 
 E s 
 
 *E ipiXov 
 
 Epsilon e short 
 
 z I 
 
 Zr\xa 
 
 Zeta dz 
 
 H n 
 
 r Hza 
 
 Eta e long [thick 
 
 & 
 
 Orjxa 
 
 Theta th sharp, as in 
 
 I i 
 
 'lara 
 
 Iota i 
 
 K x 
 
 KoLitna 
 
 Kappa k 
 
 A A 
 
 AdpfiSa 
 
 Lambda I 
 
 M (i 
 
 Mv 
 
 Mu m 
 
 N v 
 
 Nv 
 
 JYu n 
 
 X 1 
 
 m 
 
 Xi x 
 
 O o 
 
 U fiixgov 
 
 Omicron o short 
 
 n n & 
 
 m 
 
 Pi p 
 
 P 9 
 
 C PS 
 
 Rho r 
 
 2 tf, s final 2Jty[ia 
 
 Sigma s sharp 
 
 T t7 
 
 Tav 
 
 Tau t 
 
 t v 
 
 'YxpiXov 
 
 Upsilon u 
 
 Cp 
 
 0L 
 
 Phi ph 
 
 x X 
 
 XI 
 
 Chi ch 
 
 & yj 
 
 m 
 
 Psi ps 
 
 SL co 
 
 iy Jl {isya. 
 
 Omega o long 
 
10 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 € and v were originally used both as vowels 
 and as breathings, s was equivalent to our h, 
 v to our / or v.* When used as vowels they 
 were called ^ikd, smooth or unaspirated. The 
 sound of/ or v was also expressed by a letter 
 resembling a double gamma, (f,) hence called 
 Digamma. 
 
 § 2. PRONUNCIATION OF THE 
 LETTERS. 
 
 1. The Consonants are generally sounded 
 like the English letters placed opposite them 
 in the table, y, otherwise hard, before a pala- 
 tal mute (x, y, #,) is sounded like ng, as ciyys- 
 kos anggelos, *Ay%i<$r\s Angchises, ayxcov ang- 
 kon, Z(piy% Sphinx. 
 
 2. Vowels, s and r\ are sounded like a in 
 fate ; s short as in 8i, i\ long as in ijSn {delay). 
 
 e however, in the middle of a syllable and in 
 the antepenult is shortened (corripitur) into the 
 sound of e in met, as nivxs pentay, stvtib 
 etupay. 
 
 3. o and a are sounded like o in note, iya, 
 vno. o before a consonant is commonly short- 
 ened into o in not, as koyos (logos). 
 
 4. a, i, v, may be either short or long, hence 
 called doubtful. 
 
 * Of this original power of u many traces remain in the later form of the 
 language. Compare P>oZs with the Latin hos, bovis, and vavg with the 
 Latin navis. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 11 
 
 a long is sounded like a in father, short like 
 a in fat. 
 
 i long like i in machine, short like i in pin. 
 
 Note. In the antepenult these letters are 
 generally sounded short. 
 
 v always like u in tube. 
 
 5. Diphthongs. These are formed by the 
 union of the back vowels, a, s, 6, a, v, co, with 
 the front vowels, v, i, and of these latter with 
 each other. 
 
 at, av, si, ev, oi, ov, vi, are called proper diph- 
 thongs. 
 
 at, av, ni, wv, cot, av, vi, are called improper 
 diphthongs. 
 
 In at, r\i, cot, the i is written under (a, y, co), 
 hence called i subscript. Of the proper diph- 
 thongs, 
 
 at is sounded like the English ay. 
 
 av like ow in now, avxdg (owtar). 
 
 oi like oi in voice. 
 
 ov like oo in moon, ovxoi. 
 
 vi like the English pronoun we. 
 
 6. Examples. Movaa, pronounced with ov 
 like oo, and a sharp, as in sin ; [.wvavs, ov and 
 a as before, i\ like long a in fate (moosase). 
 Pronounce avxos, avTrjs, tovtov, Tavxy\g, avrai, 
 ravrnv, rig, xivog (tenos), Tvmco, tvtztov, ov7ico, 
 pifyfo eXsyov, Tvitrerai, iXs^dfxrfv, vlos, vloL 
 
INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 § 3. DIVISION OF THE CONSONANTS. 
 
 1. Consonants are divided into 
 
 a) Double consonants, J, equivalent to 8a 
 (pronounced soft, dz), and |, yj, for which see 
 ^ 4. 1. 
 
 b) Semivowels, A, ^, v, g, a, of which A, p, v, 
 g, are called liquids, and (i, v, (together with 
 y sounded as ng,) are nasals. 
 
 c) Mutes, distributed according to their 
 organ of pronunciation, thus, 
 
 lip-letters, or labials, it, /3, cp, 
 palate-letters, or palatals, x, y, %, 
 tongue-letters, or Unguals, t, 8, &. 
 
 2. These are again distinguished as unaspi- 
 rated, or smooth, it, x, t ■ aspirated, or rough, 
 (p, %, &• and partially aspirated, hence called 
 intermediate, or middle, /3, y, 8. 
 
 3. The mutes then sustain to each other a 
 twofold relation, thus expressed ; 
 
 Smooth, Middle, Rough. 
 Labials, it, (3, cp, 
 
 Palatals, x, y, %, 
 
 Linguals, t, 8, &. 
 
 % i. CHANGES OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 The following principles enter extensively 
 into the inflections of the Greek language. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 13 
 
 Especially in nouns, adjectives, and participles, 
 of the third declension, and in the verb, the 
 student will be required to recur to them at 
 every step. 
 
 1. Labial mutes with a {itd, fid, yd,) form the 
 double consonant ijj. 
 
 Palatals with a (xd, yd, %d,) form the double 
 consonant |. * 
 
 Linguals before a (xd, dd, &d,) are dropped. 
 Thus, 
 
 yvits, fiXsTtdco, (pkifis, ygdcpdco — yvip, filixpo, 
 cpksip, ygdxpco. 
 
 xogaxs, Xeydco, ovv%s, cpdXayyg, — xdgat;, Aifw, 
 ovv%, cpdXay%. 
 
 %dgirs, laiindds, nsi&dco, addco, dapardi, — 
 %dgis, Xapndg, neida, ado, dco^adi. 
 
 2. Labials before ^ (tt/i, fip, (p$) become p. 
 Palatals before p (up, yp, %(*,) become y. 
 Linguals before fi (t^, dp, &fx,) become d. 
 
 Thus, 
 
 TEiv7tfxac, si'hjppou, yiygacppcu, — TSTVfxpai, 
 si'hr}[A[Aai, yeyga^iai. 
 
 nijiXeycfiat, XeXeypai, TETv%[iai, — nenXsypai, 
 XiXsypai, xixvypcu. 
 
 TjvvTfiai, qdpou, nknu&pai, — r\vvd[iai, ydpcu, 
 
 TtkltSLdliaL. 
 
 3. Linguals before linguals usually become 
 d, as S7t8Ld , -&r}v hnzid-&r\v, j}8&r}v jjd&qv, and 
 
 * Except compounds with ix, as ixtra^a, not ££«£«. 
 1* 
 
14 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 before x are dropped, as nknu&xa, nkituxa, 
 ySxa yxa, ijgnadxa ygnaxa. 
 
 4. v, fi, and y sounded as Jig, are nasal, v a 
 lingual, p a labial, y (ng) a palatal. Therefore 
 v stands only before Unguals ; before the labials 
 (/3, 7r, (p, (i,) it is changed into p, before the 
 palatals (x, y, %,) into y. Thus, for ivfidnxco, 
 ivTZiTtza, awn g da oco, avvcpiftAi, avvftoXos, avvyga- 
 cpsvs, write k^dnxco^ s^txltixco^ av^7tgdxxco, av[i- 
 <fy\lii, avfxfioXos, avyygacpzvs. 
 
 5. v before g or A is changed into the same 
 letter, as avvXkyo avkXsya, avvgdnxco avggdnxco. 
 
 6. v before a is omitted, (except in Iv and avv, 
 of which the latter is sometimes assimilated, as 
 avvaixos, avaaixos. It is also retained in a few 
 other words.) as daifiovai daiftoai, ^teXavs ^.dXag. 
 
 7. v and a lingual (vr, vo, i/#,) before a are 
 both dropped, and the preceding vowel, if 
 short, is lengthened, as ndvxai ndai, xexvcpav- 
 xai zsxvydai, ouxvvvxai dsixvvai. In this case 
 e goes into a, and o into ov, as Xsovxai Xiovai, 
 xvcp&ivxai xvy&sTai, ixovxac ixovai, xvnxovxai 
 
 XVTZXOVat, 6d0VX9 6d0VS, XV71SVXS XVTtSlS. 
 
 8. Two mutes of different organs standing 
 together, must be of the same degree of aspira- 
 tion, as 7TT, not n& • X7r, not xft • /3#, not /3r. 
 The first is generally accommodated to the 
 second, as gdcpxco gdnxco, ixvn&i\v ixvcpd^v, 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 15 
 
 iXsy&yv ikix&yv, oxdoos oydoos, ygacpxos 
 yganxos. Except ix in composition, as ix&'eih 
 vat, 
 
 9. Two successive syllables do not begin 
 each with an aspirate. The first therefore is 
 made smooth. This rule holds especially in 
 reduplication, as rs&vxa for &i&vxa, 7t£cpil7ixa 
 for (psyityxa, Ti&r}[AL for difhtfiii 
 
 Exc. a) Aor. Pass, in d-qv, as lptf#a#?p. 
 b) Compound words generally, as icpvcpaiva, 
 
 In e/o this rule applies to the rough breath- 
 ing, as £%co for s%a. 
 
 10. A smooth mute preceding a rough 
 breathing is aspirated ; thus, for §7zrj[Asgos icprj- 
 [asqos. So in separate words, as dcp' ov for 
 drf ov. 
 
 11. The concurrence of three consonants is 
 generally avoided ; often by dropping a, as 
 sacpdXa&aL itiqmX&ai, x£xv7Z6d , ai (x£xvip6ou) xs- 
 Tvcp&cu, TcenXexad-ai (jtSTiXi^&ac) 7t£7tXi%&cu. 
 
 Exc. a) When the first or last of the con- 
 sonants is a liquid (A, ^u, v, g, y sounded as ng) 9 
 as 7t£[ji(p&£is, axhjgos, xkyt-a. b) When x or 
 a comes in composition before two consonants, 
 as Svaup&agxos, £X7ixco(jis, ixipv^co. On the other 
 hand, a kindred mute is sometimes inserted 
 between two liquids, to smooth the pronuncia- 
 tion, as dvgos dvdgos, [i£Ornigia {.udrfpfigia, 
 
 ll£{l}.£Tai [l£{Xp}.£TOU. 
 
16 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 12. Promiscuous examples. Let the pupil 
 write properly the following words ; hv7Z&rjv, 
 iXTjfidTjv, en:8o(xos, fisfiXaTtfiai, ndvxaa, tvtzoco, 
 ivygdcpa, evyeygacpxai, ivysygcupfiai, ivyiyga- 
 qpacu, £v($£fia7t[.iaL, ivefidjt&ijv, iv%£Lgi8iov, aw- 
 ka(j.fidvco, 6vv\i\$G0[io.i, ctvvXtjfi&rjvai, zs&ga- 
 q)[,iai, &£&gacpjcu, Xiycia, ddfia, yjTJqjidpa, fiXs- 
 novTcfi, d'l-d'SVTCi, SiSovTOi, dgjiddaco, VVXTS, 
 oivaxTS, xsipavaii yvrts, xkipaxai, (pscpavxa, 
 7ZS7toi&avTOi, ovvTzei&ctai, cpXifioi, ygdcpda, aicovcft, 
 
 § 5. BREATHINGS. 
 
 1. Every word beginning with a vowel has 
 either a smooth or rough breathing (spiritus 
 asper or lenis). The rough breathing is in- 
 dicated thus ( c ), as dgfiovia, and answers to 
 our h. Elsewhere the smooth breathing ( 3 ) is 
 employed, which does not perceptibly affect 
 the pronunciation, as IniL 
 
 2. In diphthongs the breathing is placed 
 over the second letter, as algsco, elkov. 
 
 3. v in the Attic dialect is always aspirated 
 at the beginning of a word, as vdxiv&os, into. 
 
 4. g at the beginning of a word or syllable 
 is aspirated, as gyjrcog. When g is doubled, 
 the first takes the smooth breathing, the second 
 the rough, as Ilvggos. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 17 
 
 ^ 6. ACCENTS. 
 
 1. One syllable in every Greek word has an 
 accent, i. e. is pronounced with a slight eleva- 
 tion and stress of voice, called (rtgoacpdia b^sta) 
 a sharp tone or accent. This syllable is indi- 
 cated by this mark (') placed over the ac- 
 cented syllable, as sv&vs. This is called the 
 acute accent. 
 
 2. All other syllables are said to be pro- 
 nounced with the grave accent, or falling tone 
 ('), which is not usually expressed. 
 
 3. When a word, whose last syllable is ac- 
 cented, stands in connexion before other words, 
 the acute is softened down, and is expressed 
 by the grave ; thus, ogyy) 8i zroAAa dgdv dvayxd- 
 &l xaxd. When therefore the student meets 
 with the grave accent on the last syllable of a 
 word, he will remember it is merely a softened 
 acute. 
 
 4. When two syllables, having an acute 
 accent followed by a grave, are combined in 
 pronunciation, their united accents make the 
 circumflex (")~, as xiirtos xfJ7tos. 
 
 § 7. PLACE OF THE ACCENTS. 
 
 1. The acute accent stands always over one 
 of the last three syllables, the circumflex over 
 one of the last two. 
 
18 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 2. The circumflex requires a long vowel or 
 diphthong, as Tipdzs, xaXov, cpsvys, (pas. 
 
 3. The acute can stand on the antepenult, 
 only when the final syllable is short. The 
 diphthongs ou and oi at the end of words are, 
 in reference to this rule, chiefly regarded as 
 short, as dvdgco7ioc, Tvmzxai. The principal 
 exception is the Opt. 3. Sing., as nonjcai. 
 
 4. When the last syllable is short, or long 
 only by position, the penult, if long, takes only 
 the circumflex, as gijfxa, olvos. 
 
 5. If the final syllable is long, the penult can 
 have only the acute, as gifccog, otvij. 
 
 6. Contracted final syllables generally take 
 the circumflex, as dfajdovs, ripd. 
 
 7. Let the pupil accent the following words 
 (the dots indicating the accented syllable), %gij- 
 a, 'srvrtTOV, cfvvodos, *Ake £avdgog, nagd, sicodec, 
 dveyva, daxrvkiov, ixsivov, ticpgayidd, ngdy^id^ 
 irtedrjTcsv. 
 
 § 8. CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 1. These arise from the concurrence of two 
 or more vowels, and take place sometimes in 
 the radical part of a word, as eag, rjg, more 
 frequently by a vowel in the termination meet- 
 ing a vowel in the root, as th#£-os, tu%ovs. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 19 
 
 2. The following are some of the usual con- 
 tractions. 
 
 a) e'C and o'C into the diphthongs £i and 01, as 
 tsl%s'C Tsfysi, ac8oC aldoT. 
 
 b) Two vowels into a kindred long sound, as 
 sa into 77, T£i%£a T£i%7]. es into u, as tzous, 
 noiei. £0, of, oo, into ov, as T£t%£os th^ovs, 
 [AidO-os-ov. ao, aov, aco, oa, 077, into co, as tl- 
 fidcofX£v tl[ago£1£V, aiSoa aldS. 
 
 c) a£, ar\, into a, as a£dXos cldXos, Tt[ia£ rifxa. 
 au and aj) into a, as ri[xd£t Tt^cl. 
 
 d) a before or after a long sound disappears, 
 
 £01 01, £7} 71, £CD CO, C0£ CO. 
 
 EXC. £CU J), aS TV7tT£0U TV7tTJJ. 
 
 e) o before and after long o sounds (co, 01, 
 ov,) disappears. 
 
 Exc. on and o# become 01. 
 Inf. oai> becomes ovv, as [iiadouv [iiodovv. 
 For exceptions to the above rules see de- 
 clensions, &,c. 
 
 § 9. FINAL LETTERS. 
 
 1. To datives plural in at, and to third per- 
 sons of verbs in £ and t, v is added before 
 words beginning with a vowel, as lv noteaiv 
 avxov, hvyjsv avjov. This is called v £cp£l%v- 
 aiLxov. 
 
 2. The preposition ix, out of, becomes l£ 
 before a vowel. Ov, not, becomes before a 
 
20 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 vowel ovx or ov%, as ov ndqetiTiv, ovx saziv, 
 
 OV% V7ZSOTIV. 
 
 3. a is a weak letter, and easily falls away, 
 [ii%gis and [*£%Qi, oi/gig an ^ &XQ L i ovzcos and 
 ovtco. See 4 4. 11. ^ 11. 4. 6., and 2d Pers. 
 Sing. Pass, of Verbs. 
 
 4. No genuine Greek word ends in any other 
 consonant than v, o, or tf, except ex and ovx, 
 which, however, never terminate a clause. 
 
 Obs. Hence nouns, whose root terminates 
 in any other than one of these consonants, 
 always either drop this consonant, as Tcgay^ax, 
 TtQ&yna, or assume another letter, usually tf, as 
 XafXTTdd (kafxrtdds) kafutds. 
 
 § 10. CHARACTERS. 
 
 1. The Greek mark of interrogation is the 
 English semicolon ( ; ), as tl tovto ; for a colon 
 and semicolon a point is placed at the top of 
 the line, thus tovto ■ xai 
 
 2. Apostrophe ( ' ) cuts off a vowel from the 
 end of a word when the next begins with a 
 vowel, as dn > dg%ijs. 
 
 3. Crasis (') is frequently employed to in- 
 dicate the coalescence of vowels in different 
 words, to prevent a hiatus, as to dfajdis raA?/- 
 dk, toc dyadd TayaOd, toc epd Tapd, xai iv 
 
 XOLV. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 21 
 
 §11. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 1. Greek nouns have three numbers, singu- 
 lar, plural, and dual (denoting two) ; and five 
 cases expressing different relations, as follows, 
 
 Norn. The subject of the verb. 
 
 Gen. Of or from, indicating possession or 
 origin. 
 
 Dat. For or with, remote object or instru- 
 ment. 
 
 Ace. The object of the verb. 
 
 Voc. Used in addressing a person. 
 
 2. There are three forms of Greek declen- 
 sion, in all which one primitive form of in- 
 flexion is distinctly traceable. This form is 
 probably retained with least change in impure 
 (and some pure) nouns of the third declen- 
 sion. 
 
 3. In the inflexion of nouns we distinguish 
 two parts, the root and the termination. A 
 termination can be in no other consonant than 
 v, g, or a (^ 9. 4). The roots, to which they 
 are appended, may have every variety of ter- 
 mination. They may end in either of the fol- 
 lowing letters, mutes, n, (3, cp, x, y, %, t, 3, 0, 
 liquids, A, p, v, g, vowels, a, e, q, i, o, v, o. 
 
 4. The general termination of the nomina- 
 tive is a ' this being a weak letter (§ 9. 3) it 
 
 2 
 
22 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 is frequently dropped. This is especially the 
 case with feminine nouns of the first declen- 
 sion, and neuters of the second and third. 
 
 5. All the consonant roots (mutes and li- 
 quids) with the roots in f, i, v, belong to the 
 third declension, those in a and y\ to the first, 
 those in o and a chiefly to the second. The 
 following table presents the usual forms. 
 
 i f " 
 
 O v © 
 
 Oi O -;» A 
 
 o © 
 
 6 © © © o o© c © o o © 
 
 ■Q v O v © V C2 *r\ *■£-! V Q v O "O v © v O © 
 
 •|-g -5- 
 
 .1 nU 
 
 r Z »» © » © :s -; a 
 
 © © © © © 
 
 5 2 S 5 B S 
 
 ©©OO© © s 
 
 »s> ^ »a «i >» vg v i 
 
 oo©oo 00 o©o©o 
 
 "8 
 
 -a 
 
 "- 
 
 "8 
 
 n a 
 
 C* 
 
 ^ 
 
 '0 
 
 Cf> 
 
 
 
 
 •Q 
 
 « 
 
 uu 
 
 «c 
 
 <o 
 
 ^f 
 
 •q 
 
 *6 
 
 K 
 
 ft 
 
 fe 
 
 t- 
 
 K 
 
 <= -a S n o 
 
 ^2 o© ,0» JO JO «© Jj> <o o© 
 
 2 3 3 2 '5 "g "g "s 
 
 a 
 
 H 
 
 C£* c/) cji o * fc e <j Q s * S * ^ *" 
 
 £ £ o" Q <i > ^ fc O S £ o Q < f> 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 23 
 
 7. The principal irregularities in Xoyos and 
 liovaa arise, it is perceived, from the rejection 
 of the weak consonant a (§ 9. 3), and then 
 making contractions more or less irregular, 
 fiovaass iiovaas fiovcfai, Xoyoss Xoyos Xoyoi, 
 Xoyoog Xoyoo Xoyov. 
 
 8. The original termination of the Ace. Sing, 
 seems to have been in v. After a consonant it 
 was changed, by a law which prevailed exten- 
 sively in the Greek language, into a. a being 
 once adopted became the common termination, 
 and the ending in v was restricted to a few 
 classes of pure names. Analogous changes are 
 seen in the 3 plur. Perf. Pass., as TSTgdcpaxai 
 for TSTQanvTcu, and scpOdgajai for icpdagvxai. 
 And the Ionic dialect abounds in forms like the 
 following, 7iS7tavajai for itknoLvvxai, nvdoiaxo 
 for Ttvdoivjo, xsxXtaxai for xsxXivxcu, de<j7i6xsa 
 for de07toTriv.* 
 
 § 12. THE ARTICLE. 
 
 
 Sin 
 
 gular. 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 31. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 M. F. N. 
 
 M. 
 
 F. N. 
 
 N. 
 
 6 
 
 V 
 
 TO 
 
 N. 
 
 > , 
 
 61 
 
 at ra, the 
 
 G. 
 
 TOV 
 
 Ttjq 
 
 TOV 
 
 A. < 
 
 > TO) T« TO) 
 
 TW 
 
 tiov Tbiv, of the 
 
 D. 
 
 TW 
 
 v± 
 
 TW 
 
 G.\ 
 
 
 To7g 
 
 ralg rolg, to the 
 
 A. 
 
 TOV 
 
 TV\V 
 
 TO 
 
 D-l 
 
 Toiv Taw toIv 
 
 Tovg 
 
 rag tix, the. 
 
 * See this subject treated by Hupfeld, Jahn's Yahrbiicher, Vol. IX. 
 (1829,) p. 472. 
 
24 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 § 13. FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 Characteristic vowel a, and, in the singular, ^. 
 The masculine adds s, thus making four ter- 
 minations, a, ?/, feminine, as, ijs, masculine. 
 
 1. Terminations. 
 
 N. 
 
 a 
 
 Sing. 
 G. D. A. 
 
 7]q rj av 
 
 V. 
 
 « (pure) a? 
 ga 
 
 V 
 ag 
 
 7jg 
 
 So <5o'|a, glory, ylojooa, a tongue, 
 
 ■Oulaaaa, a sea. 
 So cpi'hla. friendship, oxid, a sha- 
 dow, ohlvc, a house, 
 gag ga gav ga. So -frvga, a door, rjfiiga, a day. 
 Xwqm, a region. 
 So Ivnrj, grief, Tifxrj, honor, xjjvxrj, 
 
 a soul, cptovrj, a voice- 
 So vsaviag, a youth, ta^iag, a steio- 
 
 ard, JJv&ayogag. 
 So 7ion)Ti']Q, a poet, Xi]OTT]g, a rob- 
 ber, TdoJvrjg, a tax-gatherer. 
 
 rjg jj 7}V r\ 
 
 V 
 
 Dual, 
 cciv aiv a a. 
 Plural, 
 (av aig ug ai 
 
 Examples. 
 
 y\ do$u, glory. <% t^tJ, honor. 6 ttoIIttiq, the 
 
 citizen. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. 86%a 
 G. do^rjg 
 
 D. doty 
 A. do$uv 
 V. do$a 
 
 Sing. 
 N. rifir) 
 G. Tiprjg 
 
 D. Tlf-HJ 
 
 A. tifirjv 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. TToXlTTjg 
 
 G. noliiov 
 D. nollii] 
 A. tioIIttjv 
 V. TioXlra 
 
 o vsaviag, the 
 youth. 
 
 Sing. 
 N. vsaviag 
 G. vtavlov 
 D. vsavict 
 A. vsaviav 
 V. vwvia 
 
 * Nouns in tins, and a few others, make the Vocative Singular in *}, as 
 'Ar^uiru. Arxrrvs makes » or a. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 25 
 
 Dual. Dual. Dual. Dual, 
 
 N. A. V. S6*a N. A. V. xifiu N. A. V. ttoUtcc N.A. V. vsavla 
 
 G. D. dol-aiv G. D. xifiouv G. D. noViiaiv G. D. vsavlaiv 
 
 Plural. Plural. Plural. Plural. 
 
 N. do^ccL N. Tifial N. noXi.Tv.i N. vsavicu 
 
 G. do!-a)V G. jificov G. tioIitwv G. veuviwv 
 
 D. do'Sa*? D. tifxoug D. TtoMxaiq D. vsavlaig 
 
 A. (SoSae A. rifidg A. nolhag A. vsavlag 
 
 V. doi-at V. T^tat V. 7ro^T«i V. viavlai. 
 
 § 14. EXERCISES ON THE FIRST 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 1. English into Greek. 
 ^ mwse. 0/* a mt/se. 0/" /Ae wmse. .Fbr ^e 
 wwse. TTie muses. Of the muses. The house. 
 The house of the muses. The friendship of the 
 muses. The honor of the house. Grief (fi Ivitif). 
 The grief of the youth. The soul of the poet. 
 The voice of honor. The door of the house. 
 Doors of houses. The voices of the poets. The 
 voice of friendship. Of the voices of friendship. 
 With the tongues (rat? yXaaacus) of the poets. 
 Of the shadow of the house. Of the shadows of 
 the houses. 
 
 Remark 1. The genitive is often placed 
 between the noun and article on which it is 
 dependent ; thus, r\ jyjs oixias dyad, the shadow 
 of the house ; r\ irjs Xyn-qs ahta, the cause of 
 grief. 
 
 Rem. 2. With abstract nouns, as names of 
 virtues, vices, &c, the article is employed or 
 
 2* 
 
26 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 omitted at pleasure ; as drunkenness, r) [xidn or 
 liidii, friendship, rj cptXta or cpilia. 
 
 2. Greek into English. 
 a and rj. 
 C II dvga Tijs olxiag. Trjg cpcovi\g tSv Movacov. 
 C H jijg yjv%rjg impikua. c H dydnn Trjg Tipr}?. 
 e H elgijvng cpcovij. II £a?j zrjs vjv%rjg. A I axial 
 tcjv vecpsXcov. Ao^ai xal IniQv^iiai xal ridovai. 
 c H dgeTrjg ridovij. c H dg%i} £arjs. Ilriyrj Trjg 
 oocpiag. Al oixiai Trjg xco^trig. At xcofiac Trjg 
 %cogag. Al %cogat zijg yrjg. c II xopj Trjg xscpa- 
 hjg. Tjj cpcovfj Trjg figovTijg. Trjg yscpvgag xal 
 Trjg daXdaorig. 
 
 a? and rig. 
 
 c O d£67ioTiig Trjg olxiag. ° H vixr\ rav HsgaSv. 
 Ol vavxai Trig QaXdaa-qg. c H xagdia tov ?tgo- 
 ooxov. f H xXsTtzov oiyij. Ol OTgazicoTai tov 
 MikTidSov. Tov HvOaydgov fxadiiTov. c H 
 ATgsid&v 6gyr\. € H dXxrj tov veaviov. Q H gco- 
 ixrj tcov dOfaiTav. ' H dxTrj dakdaaiig. c H vea- 
 viov Ttatdsia. 
 
 Remark. The Greeks frequently omit the 
 article, where the English idiom requires it, 
 provided its omission creates no obscurity ; 
 thus, the country of the king, r) %^Q a T °v P ac(l - 
 Xicog, or r) %coga Paoilscog, or ?/ fiaOiXecog /coga, 
 r) xXivtxov oiyij, the silence of the thief or of a 
 thief 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 27 
 
 § 15. 'Em and 2JT. 
 
 Sing, Sing. 
 
 N. syd, I N. ov, thou 
 
 G. ffiov or [iov, of me G. gov, of thee 
 
 D. f/Aol or pol, to ox for me D. aoi, to or for thee 
 
 A. ipd or ^5, we A. as, thee 
 
 Dual. Dual. 
 
 N. A. vwi, vo), we two N. A. acpS'i, ocpco, you two [two 
 
 G. D. vco'iv, vajv, of or £0 us two G. D. oywiv, oyotv, of ox to you 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 N. rifinq, we N. vfislg, you 
 
 G. rj^iwv, of us G. vfibiv, of you 
 
 D. 17^, £0 ox for us D. i^u^, /o yow 
 
 A. T^as, ws A. ifioig, you. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 1. English into Greek. 
 
 Of me. Forme. Me. Of us. To us. We. 
 
 Us. Thou. You. Of thee. Of you. We 
 two. You two. The house of me (my house). 
 
 The head of thee (thy head), ?/ xecpaXri aov. 
 
 Thy voice. My heart (xagStu). Of my life. 
 
 Of our lives. Our region. Of our houses. Of 
 my houses. 
 
 2. Greek into English. 
 
 C H ylcoGdd pov. Ai yXatioai fyicov. c H im- 
 Ovfiia zijs xagdias [iov. c O Beotcoiijs ttJs %agas 
 ijficov. Ot dsanotcu fjficov. c H fjdov?] jf f 9 cpihias 
 aov. ' H %agd zrjs ipv%rjs [xov. ' O fiadi^rifs dov. 
 C H dg%tf rrjs ^coijs [iov. 
 
28 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 Examples with eivcu, to be (see ^61), and 
 Prepositions (^ 75). 
 
 "Egtl (there is) Ovga iv rij olxta. C H fxidn 
 pavia ioTLV. c H ay amy rfjs elgijvns itiiiv iv Tjj 
 xagdta [iov. e H XvTtn idrlv iv xagdiaig vjacov. 
 Ovx ix nevlas iozl Xvtcij dXX 9 i| iTttdv^iiag. C H 
 (piXagyvgia iaxl gt£a rrjs xaxias. *Ex rfjs dgs- 
 Tr(S i(JiLv evdaipovia. c H dgeri] xai ?) docpia 
 Zed?) Tij? ywxrjg itinv. c O xXe7ZT7j? iariv iv t?J 
 oixia. c H <piXia iaxi irr^yij ijSovijs. c H axyjvq 
 [iov idle nagd ti\v QaXacaav. 3 JEv rjj ivroXjj dov 
 idle %v>gd {.iov. 
 
 Remark 1. Our indefinite article is indicated 
 in Greek by the absence of the article ; as, 
 Ovga, a door, 
 
 2. In Greek the predicate generally omits 
 the article ; as, ?) ^fiiga rv§ iysvsro, the day 
 became night ; i) vv£ i/fisga iysvsro, the night 
 became day ; t) fxsOn (.iavia iozLv. But if the 
 predicate is more limited than the subject, it 
 may take the article ; as, *bioovs i\v 6 vlos rov 
 Qeov, Jesus was the son of God, (it being sup- 
 posed there was but one son of God.) 
 
 3. In Greek, as in Latin, two singular nouns 
 united by the conjunction xai, (and,) take a 
 verb either in the singular or plural; as, upi} 
 xai dgtTi] iaxiv or eioiv. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 29 
 
 § 16. CONTRACTS OF THE FIRST 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 'Egkct iga, igiag igas, igia igcl, igeav igav, 
 &,c. 
 
 Fake?] yakrj, yali-qs yaXip, yakey yciXjj, &,c. 
 
 § 17. SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 1. Characteristic vowel o, lengthened by the 
 Attics in some words into co. The nominative 
 attaches s for the masculine, v for the neuter; 
 hence os and cog, masculine, (sometimes femi- 
 nine,) ov and cov neuter. 
 2. Singular. 
 
 o (speech) to (work) o (temple) to (hall) 
 zqyov 
 Eqyov 
 sgytn 
 Eqyov 
 Eqyov 
 
 Dual. 
 I'qya) 
 tqyoLV 
 
 Plural, 
 i'qya 
 Eqyoav 
 i'qyoig 
 Eqyv. 
 sgya 
 
 So xoopog, world, ccv&gwTiog, man, &eog, God, ijXiog, sun, 
 §log, life, ocpdodpog, eye, vlog, son, vopog, law, nXomog, wealth, 
 dojgov, gift, dsvdqov, tree, cpvXXov, leaf, nsdtov, plain, (xhqov, 
 measure, £wov, animal, texvov, child, ayyelog, messenger, no- 
 rafiog, river, noXtfiog, war. 
 
 N. 
 
 Xoyog 
 
 G. 
 
 Xcyov 
 
 D. 
 
 Xoyca 
 
 A. 
 
 Xoyov 
 
 V. 
 
 Xoys 
 
 N.A.V. X6yco 
 
 G. D. 
 
 Xoyoiv 
 
 N. 
 
 Xoyoi 
 
 G. 
 
 Xoyojv 
 
 D. 
 
 Xoyoig 
 
 A. 
 
 Xoyovg 
 
 V. 
 
 Xoyoi 
 
 vscog 
 
 CCVCOyEGJV 
 
 VE(ti 
 
 avcoyECO 
 
 VE(p 
 
 arwysq) 
 
 veoov 
 
 ctvcoyswv 
 
 VEwg 
 
 avwyEav 
 
 VE(6 
 
 avwyEG) 
 
 VECpV 
 
 avojyEcov 
 
 VE(S 
 
 avwyEto 
 
 VE03V 
 
 avcoysav 
 
 VEcog 
 
 avcoysmg 
 
 VEc6g 
 
 ccvcoyEO) 
 
 vsa 
 
 av(6yE(o. 
 
30 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 3. Exercises on the Second Declension. 
 
 a) A word. Of a word. With a icord 
 (Xoycp). The icord. Of the words. The word 
 of God. The ivords of the man. The icorks of 
 God. The life of man. The leaves of the trees. 
 Jl leaf of a tree. The leaves of a tree. Of the 
 leaves of the trees. Of the trees of the forest 
 (yhj). The eye of the man. The ways (r) boos) 
 of the rivers. 
 
 b) The sun is the eye of the world. Man is 
 an animal. The law of the Lord is in my heart. 
 Thou art the son of God. Wealth is a gift of 
 God. There is (tan) a tree near the river. 
 The eye of the Lord (xvqios) is upon the earth. 
 The voice of the Lord is in the earth. The sun 
 is in the clouds (vscpiXv). The sun is thy mes- 
 senger. The river of death (O&voltos). The 
 leaves of the tree of life (£&ij). The river of life 
 is from (ix, out of) the throne (Ogovos) of God. 
 
 4. Greek into English. 
 
 c O vofios tov Osov. c O Xoyos etScoXov idxi 
 tijs ipv/ljs. c H AiyvitTos Scjqov loxi tov Nei- 
 Xov. Hapd tols AlyvTCxiois 6 ijXios xal i) Gehrj- 
 vij ® a0i tlGlv ' Ev cuqxV V v o hoyos xal 6 ).6yos 
 t)v nagd tw 6sa. Td nXold fxov iv xrj OaXdaar^ 
 ear iv. c O vtzvos icnlv ddskyos tov Oavdxov. 
 
 OtVOS iOTL xdTOTlTQOV TOV VOV. 01 aVE^Ol XCU 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 31 
 
 q OdXadCfOL BovXol slaiv dvdgconcov. *Eyco slpi 
 diddctxaXos, av [uxdrjirfs. *Ev otvco idrlv dXijOaia. 
 c O cp66os tov Kvgtov idzlv dg%rj jrjs aocpias. 
 c O %govos iorlv ogyrjs (pdgpaxov. * Ev tq 2Jlxs- 
 Xia iozlv 3 ^(pgoScrris vecos. 
 
 § 18. CONTRACTS. 
 
 N. voos (mind) vovs, G. voov vov, D. vocp vS, 
 A. voov vovv, V. vos vov. Dual, voco vco, vooiv 
 volv. PL VOOl vol, vocov vav, VOOIS VOLS, &c. 
 
 *Ootsov octovv (bone), baxiov ootov, ocnicp 
 otiTco, oaxsov ogtovv. Dual, ogteco 6gt6, bcxioiv 
 ogtolv. PL oOTsa dard, otiziav dozav, Slc. 
 
 § 19. ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS 
 IN OZ, H, ON. 
 
 1. These have in the Feminine the termina- 
 tions of the first declension (a or ??), in the 
 Masculine and Neuter those of the second 
 (os, ov). 
 
 Singular. 
 N. ooq>-6g, v\, ov 
 G. oocp-ov, i]g, ov 
 D. oocp-v, fj, <y 
 A. ooqp-ov, r\v, ov 
 V. oocp-t, 1], ov 
 
 JZocpog, wise. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V. ooqp-co, d, to 
 
 G. D. O0(p-o1v, cuv, 
 
 [dlv 
 
 Plural. 
 N. oocp-oi, etc, a 
 
 G. GO(f~(x)V, (OV, wv 
 
 D. oocp-o7g, cug, otg 
 A. oocp-ovg, ctg, a 
 V. ooqp-oi, al, a. 
 
 2. Adjectives in os pure, and gos, make the 
 Feminine in a ; as, (pthos, a, ov • (iixgos, d, ov. 
 
32 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 Singula?'. 
 N. cpiXi-og, a, ov 
 G. cpiXl-ov, ctg, ov 
 D. cpill-o), a, o) 
 A. cpiXi-ov, av, ov 
 V. qpiXi-s, u, ov 
 
 ftlXiog, friendly. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V. cpiXl-w, a, w 
 
 G. D. cpiXi-oiv, aiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 | N. cplXi-oi, ai, a 
 
 G. (plkl-OJV, 0)V, (OV 
 
 D. qnXi-oig, aig, oig 
 A. cpiM-ovg, ag, a 
 V. (flXi-oi, at, a. 
 
 Exc. Adjectives in oos make 7/ in the femi- 
 nine ; and adjectives in eos and oos are con- 
 tracted ; as, xqvgsos %qv<&vs 9 %QVG>sa %Qvctr}, 
 Xqvoeov ygvtiovv ■ hnXoos dnXovs, ajiXoi] dizXrj, 
 anXoov anXovv, &c. 
 
 3. Compound adjectives, and many others in 
 os, have but two endings, and belong exclu- 
 sively to the second declension. 
 
 3 A&dvaxog, immortal. 
 
 Singular. 
 N. r\ ct&draxoc, to a&dvaxov 
 G. xov xr]g xov u&avdxov 
 D. tw xf] xo) d&avdxo) 
 A. xov xi)v xo a&dvaxov 
 V. d&dvaxE, aOavaxov 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. ol a\ a&di'axoi, xd a&dvaxoc 
 G. xoJv xwv x(x>v d&avdxcov 
 D. xolg xalg xolg u&uvdxoig 
 A. xovg xug xu aOdvaxa 
 V. d&dvaxoi, addvaxa. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. tcu xd xw d&ardxco 
 G. D. xolv xalv xolv a&avdxoiv. 
 
 % 20. EXERCISES ON ADJECTIVES 
 IN 02J. 
 
 1. Adjectives in os, ?/, ov, c/?uZ 0?, a, ov. *Aya- 
 66s (piXos. JJocpos avQgcoTCos. c O xaAds xoopos. 
 c O Xol(A7Zq6s ijlios. Tcov dyadcov (ptXcov. Ol m- 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 33 
 
 0tol SovXoi. Ovnid £aa. Maxgd odog. Mixgd 
 Tgdns^a. IlXovjog okiyog. IlvXn tirsvrf. Azv- 
 xal tcetqoli. Aidog £sgtos. Aocpog %a\z7tog. 
 
 Qiyoavgog ioav 6 7110x65 cpikog. c O aocpos 
 avOgconos ion fiaxdgtog. c O xaigog vfxcov iortv 
 dsl sioi[AOs. Kaxog j3tog ioxlv ovdinozs fxaxd- 
 giog. J ] Eoxiv iv xapjj rifxcov dixaoitfg cpgovi^iog. 
 c O Urfyaoog innog t^v Ttxnvog. Uvdayogag ?jv 
 XTLOiTfs rrjg cpiXooocpias Trjs Arafaxrjg. ' H (isdy 
 [Mxgd \iavia ioxiv. * H odog etg "Aidov ioil nav- 
 Ta%ov biioia. C H dgerrjg odog to ngcoTOv (at 
 first) xaXsmj iortv, voregov Si gadta. C H %coga 
 €%£L (has) txavrjv (pvXaxijv. Zaijg novngdg rs- 
 Xevrrf ion Odvarog novngog. ' SI Tttorrj ipv%?j t 
 
 2. Adjectives in og of two endings. c O nXov- 
 Tog ioTL Ovwrog, fj do£a dddvarog. c O Ovfios 
 dXoytorog. Jstkov 6 nXovrog xal (piX6ipv%ov 
 xaxov. Avxco xal itctzco Ovvvofia iorov. KaXov 
 if dXjjdsta xal [xovtfiov. C H 2JtxeXta iorl vrjoog. 
 noXvdvdgcoTCog. c O Oeog iortv dykvvr(iog. Ov- 
 div iorl fiifiatov iv ra j3ta tw dvOgconiva. 
 
 Remarks. 1. When the noun is accompanied 
 by an article, the adjective is placed between 
 the article and noun, as, 6 dyadog dvdgcoTtog, 
 the good man, or follows both, with the article 
 repeated, as, 6 dvdgcoTtog 6 dyadog. c O dvdgco- 
 nog dyadog, or dyadog b dvdgcoTtog, could only 
 be read with iorl understood, the man is good. 
 'EjtotwGa rqv olxiav ri\y xaXiqv, or ivzotwoa rijy 
 3 
 
34 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 xakijv olxlav, I made the beautiful house ; but 
 inoujoa ti}v oixlav xafajv, I made (i. e. render- 
 ed) the house beautiful. 
 
 2. So the possessive pronouns epos, mine, 
 60s, thine, vfiitsgos, yours, &c. ; as, 6 ipos 8ov- 
 Aos, or 6 dovkog 6 iuos, a more emphatic form 
 for 6 Sovkos fiov, my servant. c O aos vovs to gov 
 (jS^cc psTa%siQL£eTou, thy mind controls thy body. 
 
 3. The verb elvat is often omitted ; as, 6 Ov- 
 [aos (eotlv) aloyiOTos. The adjective is often 
 put in the neuter, agreeing with a noun under- 
 stood ; as, i) ivgavvis dcpaXegov iazc, supreme 
 power is a dangerous thing (x9W a )- 
 
 §21. ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS 
 IN OZ, H, O. 
 
 The adjectives aXXos, toiovtos, tooovtos, and 
 rnhxovzos, and the pronouns os, avrog, ixuvos, 
 ovtos, have the Nom. Neut. Sing, in o. Thus, 
 
 aXXog, another. 
 Singular. Dual. Plural. 
 
 N. uXX-oi, «t, a 
 
 G. aXX-biV, (or, (iw 
 
 D. uXX-oig, aig, oig 
 
 A. uXX-ovg, ag, a. 
 
 So uviog, ipse, self, exuvog, Hie, he, bg, who. 
 
 N. aXX-og, r\, o I N.A.V. aXX-a, a, (a 
 
 G. uXX-ov, r\g, ov G. D. aXX-oiv, cav, 
 
 D. aXX-oj, y, « [on 
 
 A. uXX-ov, v\v, o J 
 
 $ 22. EXERCISES ON 3 AAAOZ. 
 
 1. s AKkos without the article means in the 
 sing, another, in the plural, others. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 35 
 
 2. With the article, it means in the singular, 
 the remaining part, in the plural, ol allot, the 
 rest (ceteri). 
 
 3. The other, in the singular, 6 hsgos. 
 
 4. Examples. * ' Ally\ #»oa, another country; 
 i) iriga #«oa, the other country ; r) allri %aga, 
 the rest of the country ; allai x®Q a h other coun- 
 tries (some others) ; at dllai %cqq(u, the rest of 
 the countries. ™ Alio SsvSgoy, another tree ; ro 
 alio 8sv8gov, the rest of the tree ; to Srsgov 
 8ev8gov, the other tree; alia 8kv8ga, other trees; 
 rd alia 8ev8ga, the rest of the trees. So, a day 
 (fffxega), another day, the other day, the rest of 
 the day, the rest of the days, other days. 
 
 So otzia, a house, dygos, a field. 
 
 % 23. "ATT02. 
 
 1. Avros with the article means always the 
 same (idem) ; as, 6 avros tokos, the same place ; 
 iv t<5 avvcp TOTtco, in the same place ; rd avid 
 ngdyfiaxa, the same things ; rcov avrcov ngay^id- 
 tcov, of the same things. 
 
 2. Avros without the article, in the nomina- 
 tive always, and in the oblique cases when fol- 
 lowed by a noun, signifies self (ipse) ; as, avros 
 iyco, I myself; avros <pqfU 9 I myself assert ; av- 
 ros 6 dvdgonos, the man himself ; rov avOgcoitov 
 avrov, or avrov rov dvdgconov, of the man him- 
 self. 
 
36 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 3. Standing alone in the oblique cases, it is 
 the demonstrative pronoun him, her, it; as, 6 
 Oeos xcd zd egya avTov, God and the tcorks of 
 him (his works) ; 6 xoopos xcd toc iv awco, the 
 world and the things in it ; iv avTco rp> £wj, in 
 him was life. 
 
 \ 24. 'OTTOS and "EKEIN02. 
 
 1. 'JExsivos (from ixst, their), signifies that 
 person there, he (ille). 
 
 2. Oifxos (from 6 and avros,) signifies this 
 (hie), this person, and follows in its inflexion 
 the article. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. ovrog, amrj, tovto N. ovtoi, uvtul, tuvtu 
 
 d tovtov, raving, tovtov G. tovtcov, tovtcov, tovtcov 
 
 D. TOVZCO, TUVTT], TOVTO) D. TOVTOig, TUVTUig, TOVTOig 
 
 A. TOVTOV, TUVt7]V, TOVTO A. TOVTOVg, TUVTUg, TUVTU 
 
 Dual 
 
 N. A. TOVIW, TUVTU, TOVICO 
 
 G. D. TOVTOIV, TUVTUlVy TOVTOIV. 
 
 3. Otfjos and ixstvos stand either before both 
 the substantive and its article, or after both ; 
 as, ovzos 6 avOgcojtos, this man ; tcov dvOgconcov 
 tovtcov, of these men ; iv ixslvrj tj} rf^sgcf, in that 
 day ; listm ti)v agav ixBlvijv, after that hour. 
 
 % 25. EXERCISES ON "AAAOZ, *AT- 
 TOJJ/ OTTO 2, &c. 
 
 3l£Ta tov OdvaTov ifticov idTiv vluv aXlos fiios. 
 Maxdgios idTiv 6 SovXos ixelvos. c H fiaoiXsia 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 37 
 
 i} spy} ovx laxiv ex tov xodjxov tovtov. Uaga 
 ravT-qv zrjv %cogav laxlv 6 7tOTa(x6s. Tovto Imiv 
 o vopos xal ol TigocpfJTai. Ol aXXot dTgaTiaiai 
 r\6av iv t£ avxto ronco. Tavzd laxiv dyadd. 
 Td Saga Tr)s rvx^s stirl dcpaXsgd, xal avx-q ian 
 TvcpXq xal xcocp-q. c O diSdaxaXos avios xal ol 
 [xadqTai avxov fjaav iv xfj avjjj aioa. 'Eya E%a 
 (have) TTJv avxr}v yva^v col (the same senti- 
 ment with thee; 6 ccvtos, the same, takes the 
 Dative after it, as in Lat. idem the Ablative 
 with cum). 
 
 § 26. THIRD DECLENSION,* 
 
 1. The third declension has as radical letters, 
 to which its terminations are attached (see 
 ^11), the mutes n, x, t, /3, y, d, qo, %, 0, the li- 
 quids A, v, g, and the vowels s, t, v, a. Roots in 
 a belong to the first declension, roots in o to 
 the second, except a few which, in the singu- 
 lar, follow the third. 
 
 2. The Nominative regularly assumes a. The 
 liquids, however, do not generally take it, and 
 many of the mutes (especially neuter roots in 
 t), instead of attaching a and dropping the t, 
 omit both ; thus, root ngayiiax, Norn, ngdy^ia 
 (reg. itgdy^as), root [aeXlt, N. piiki (reg. fxi?us), 
 Roots in ovx (reg. opts, ovs, as odovr, odovs) 
 
 * Before commencing this declension, the student should make himself 
 perfectly familiar with the principles, in §§ 3 and 4. 
 
 3* 
 
38 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 generally drop the t and make the Nominative 
 in ov ; as, Xsovt, Xicov. So all participles in av. 
 
 3. The student, then, will be careful not to 
 confound the nominative with the root, in de- 
 ciding to what class a noun belongs ; e. g. 
 TtQaypa and most nouns in a have a root in a 
 mute consonant ; many nouns in cov, a root in 
 ovt ; some a root in ov, as Saificdv, root SaTpov. 
 The first object should always be, to ascertain 
 the root (which may be found from either of 
 the oblique cases except the Voc. Sing, and 
 Dat. Plur.), as the terminations are directly 
 attached to this. 
 
 4. MUTE NOUNS. 
 
 Root, {r^Xa^ndd (to) nqdy^ax (o) xoqux (o) odovx 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. X(/.t.i7id(<$)-g 7to«^/«(t) xuQMx-g(x6ga$)odovg 
 
 G. Xit[xndd-og 7iQuyn<tT-og xoQUx-og odurx-og 
 
 D. Xaj.tndd-1 Tiod/fxaT-L xoqax-i odovx-i 
 
 A. Xafxndd-a TiQU/fAa x6(j<xx-cc cdovx-a 
 
 V. Xaixndg 7i(j<x/[ict x6qu$ odovg 
 
 Dual 
 
 N.A.V.Xafmdd-e TiQayfiax-s xoqcxx-s odorx-s 
 
 G. D. Xafxndd-otv TTQaytidr-oiv xoqdx-oiv odoix-oiv 
 
 Plur. 
 
 N. Xafindd-tg nqdyiiax-a xoqux-zg odovx-eg 
 
 G. Xufindd-wv TiQayfxdi-wv xcqux-mv odoix-wv 
 
 D. Xa/ATid(d)-ai nody^u(x)-OL x6y<x$i 6d6ri(odov)-oi 
 
 A. Xu/ATidd ug TiQdy(xui-u xoQux-ug odon-ixg 
 
 V. XafiTidd-sg 7iQdyuax-a xogax-fg odoi'T-tg. 
 
 5. Roots in it, id, id, vd, with the acute ac- 
 cent on the penult, have the Ace. Sing, both in 
 a and v ; as, %aQis (%ccqit), ^aotra, and /ccgiv 
 xoqvs (xoqvO), xogvOa, and xogvv. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 39 
 
 6. The student will easily explain the changes 
 in Mute Nouns (as, 68ovs from 686vt, vvj- from 
 vvxt), by recurring to the general principles in 
 § 4. Many roots, however, make their nom- 
 inative entirely irregularly ; as, vSar (reg. Nom. 
 v8as), vScoq, vdaros, &>c. ; yovaj, knee, (reg. 
 Nom. yovas,) yovv, yovazos ' yvvaix, woman, 
 (reg. Nom. yvvaiQ yvvrf, yvvaixos, Voc. yvvai • 
 ydlaxr, milk, (reg. Nom. ydla^,) yala, ydla- 
 tctos ' i]7tax, N. ijTtag. 
 
 7. The vocative sometimes throws off a ; as, 
 nuts (root TtatS), V. nat. Many nouns in vt 
 drop the t and make the vocative in v ; as, 
 AZolvt (N. Aias), Voc. Alav. Some proper 
 nouns drop also the ^ ; as, "Arkavz (N. 3 '^- 
 tAccs), Voc. "AiXd. 
 
 § 27. LIQUID NOUNS. 
 
 1. Root, (o) diupov (6) ipccQ (Jo) (jiilav (6) c 'EXXi]v (o) n are q 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. 8nl/A(ov ipdcQ (xiXn(v)-g "jEXXyv ncn^Q [tQog 
 
 G. datfiov-og ipuq-og fisXav-og c> EXXr)v-og naxio-og, na- 
 
 D. dat'fiov-i ipaQ-l [iiXav-i "EXXqv-t naxiq-i, nargi 
 
 A. dtxlpov-a xjj(xo-a [xiXuv-a "EXXrjv-a narsQ-a 
 
 V. dulfiov \pag {isXag "EXXqv ttoctsq 
 
 Dual. 
 
 N.A.V.dcdfiov-e xpuQ-e [isXav-s "EXXtjv- s TiartQ-e 
 
 G. D. dtxtfiov-oiv yitQ-oiv {i&Xav-ow *EXXr\v-oiv naiiq-oiv 
 
 Piur. 
 
 N. dalfxov-sg yixg-fg {iiXav-£g "EXXrji'-sg nattq-tg 
 
 G. diu/iav-tav ipao-aiv [itXuv-wv 'EXXriv-wv tuxtsq-mv 
 
 D. dixlfxo{i') at tpao-ol (jtX<i(r)-Gi"EXXr]-ai natgd-ai 
 
 A. §ixr'fio'-ag yao-ag t usXav-ag 'EXXqv-ag naTtQ-ag 
 
 V. dal/uov-eg (/;«£-{£ [itXav-sq "EXXrjv-tg naTtQ-eg. 
 
40 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 Like naiijQ, father, are declined (i^Ti]g, mother, ■&vyaTfjg, 
 daughter, yaoTi]g, stomach, except Dat. PI. yaoiijgoi. 3 Avr\g, 
 a man, (root, avig,) syncopates e and inserts d to smooth the 
 pronunciation ; as, avrjg, G. avigog, avgog avdgog, D. avigi 
 ttvSgl, Ace. aviga ocvdga, &/C, Dat. PI. avdgdai. 
 
 2. Remarks on Liquid JYouns. As Liquid 
 Nouns do not commonly add a in the nomina- 
 tive, they frequently lengthen the radical vowel 
 as above. So noi^ikv^ noipijv • gfjiog, g^rag. 
 Neuters retain the short vowel ; as, rjrog, i\to- 
 gos. Some are already long ; as, r EXl^y-os, 
 aicov-os. 
 
 3. There are no roots in p, and but one in 
 A, viz. aXs (root aA), the sea. 
 
 4. The vocative is usually like the root. 
 
 §28. PURE NOUNS. 
 
 1. These suffer many contractions by the 
 contact of the vowel of the ending with that of 
 the root, and are otherwise more changed than 
 nouns with mute and liquid roots. Few of 
 them, however, are contracted in all the cases 
 which admit contraction. Pure roots end in a, 
 t, o, v, a few in co, and three or four in a. 
 
 2. They generally attach a for the Nomina- 
 tive. 
 
 3. Roots in e. 
 These lengthen s into r/ in the nominative of 
 masculine and feminine nouns. In neuters, s is 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 41 
 
 changed into the stronger o, except in neuter 
 adjectives, which retain e. They contract most 
 of their oblique cases. 
 
 Root, rgirjoE 
 
 aXrj&i 
 
 TSIX8 
 
 Sing, a galley. 
 
 true. 
 
 a wall. 
 
 N. (ji) rgir}Q-7jg 
 
 (to) aXtj&ig 
 
 (to) Tuxog 
 
 G. T<jiiqQ-zoQ, ovg 
 
 aXt}&-sog, ovg 
 
 xux-Eog, ovg 
 
 D. TQirJQ-s'i, a 
 
 a\r]&-£'l, u 
 
 Tslx-s'h si* 
 
 A. TQlTjQ-ECC, -7] 
 
 ccXr]&eg 
 
 Ts7xog 
 
 V. TQirjgsg 
 
 akrj&eg 
 
 Tslxog 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 N.A.V.TQirjg-SE, t\ 
 
 aXr)&-ie, 7) 
 
 Tslx-SE, 7] 
 
 G. D. XQ17]Q-E01V, OiV 
 
 aXt]&-ioiv, otv 
 
 TEIX-E01V, OiV 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 
 N. TQirjQ-esg, sig 
 
 aXrj&-ea, 7) 
 
 TEfy-EOC, 7] 
 
 G. tqitjq-ewv, oov 
 
 aXri&-E(av, gov 
 
 teix-ecov, (av 
 
 D. TQirjQ-EGl 
 
 aXri&-ioi 
 
 teIx-eoi 
 
 A. TQiijg-eag, Eig 
 
 ccXt]&-s'a, r\ 
 
 tecx-ecc, 7] 
 
 V. TQllJQ-SEg, tLg 
 
 aX7]&-sa, 7) 
 
 TeIx-EU, 7]. 
 
 Exc. Many masculine nouns in s, instead of 
 lengthening e into ??, insert v, probably from the 
 ancient digamma ; thus, fiactilsFs, softened /3a- 
 cilevs, Dat. PI. fiaaihsvciL. The Attics here 
 make the Gen. Sing, in as. 
 
 Sing. 6 {king) 
 N. ftaoiXsvg 
 G. fiaatXiwg 
 D. (iaoiX-E'L, e% 
 A. fiaoiXiu 
 V. ficcoiXEV 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. paoiX-Es 
 G. D. fiaoiX-EOLV 
 
 4. Roots in 1. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. ftaaiXEEg, sig 
 
 G. ftttOlX-SOdV 
 
 D. ftaaiXEvai 
 A. fiaGiX-iag, Eig 
 V. ftaaiX-EEg, Elg. 
 
 These change t, in most feminine nouns, into 
 s, in all cases except the Nom., Ace, and Voc. 
 Sing. In the Gen. Sing, these have cos, in the 
 Dual, cpv. The Ace. Sing, ends in v. 
 
42 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 
 
 Root x/. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Z>«aZ. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 N. (o) nig 
 
 N. 
 
 A. V. xl-e 
 
 N. Xt-fC 
 
 
 G. xi-6g 
 
 
 G, D. xt-otv 
 
 G. XL-WV 
 
 
 D. Xtr-i 
 
 
 
 D. xt-ff/ 
 
 
 A. Y.VV 
 
 
 
 A. xt-a? 
 
 
 V. xig 
 
 
 Root UoXl. 
 
 V. X£-£?. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Dual 
 
 Plural 
 
 
 N. (?;) 7ro'A/? 
 
 N 
 
 A. V. notes 
 
 N. 7ToX-f£?, 
 
 m 
 
 G. noXtcaq 
 
 
 G. D. noXsmv 
 
 G. xroAftov 
 
 
 D. noXs'i, tioXsl 
 
 
 
 D. noXsoi 
 
 
 A. WAiv 
 
 
 
 A. 7ro'A-fa?, 
 
 n$ 
 
 V. 7roAt 
 
 
 
 V. noX-esg, 
 
 tig. 
 
 Neuters in i do not attach a for the nomina- 
 tive ; (Sivriiti -eos, -s'C si, oivrim, &c. 
 
 5. Roots in o. 
 
 These in the nominative lengthen o into o, 
 and part of them omit a ; as, ?) aldas (alSo), 
 shame ; ij fya (^o), echo. The Dual and Plu- 
 ral follow the second declension. 
 
 N. aidas, G. atdoog alSovs, D. atdot aidot, A. 
 aldoa alda, V. atdoi. N. igjriS, G. ?^o'os r[%QV$, 
 D. $#ot ^ot, A. ?fco'a ^6, V. ?fcot. 
 
 Anomalous is /3ovs (root /3o, with digamma, 
 /30'Js, /3oi/s, Lat. 60s, bovis, <Slc), G. f$o-6s, D. 
 /3o-t, A. /3ow, V. j3ov. Plur. /3o'fs /3o2/s, G. ftocov, 
 D. fiovai, A. /3oas ($ov$, V. /3o'£s. 
 
 6. /*W$ in v. 
 
 Neuters reject a in the Nominative. Some 
 masculines and neuters change v into s in all 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 43 
 
 the cases except the JNom., Ace, and Voc. Sing. 
 The Ace. Sing, ends in v. 
 
 Root, 
 
 (6) ($OTQV 
 
 
 (to) ddxgv 
 
 (o) nsXsxv 
 
 (rb) aarv 
 
 Sing. 
 
 grape 
 
 
 tear 
 
 axe 
 
 city 
 
 N. 
 
 fioTQVQ 
 
 
 ddxgv 
 
 nsXsxvg 
 
 aarv 
 
 G. 
 
 fioTQVoq 
 
 
 dnxgvog 
 
 nsXsxscog 
 
 OLGTE-OQ & tag 
 
 D. 
 
 fioTQV'i 
 
 
 odxQv'i 
 
 nsXsx-s'i, Si 
 
 ctOT-e'i, si 
 
 A. 
 
 fioiQVV 
 
 
 ddxgv 
 
 niXsxvv 
 
 aorv 
 
 V. 
 
 ftoTQV 
 
 
 daxgv 
 
 niXsxv 
 
 aarv 
 
 Dual 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N.A.V./Jot^vs 
 
 
 ddxgvs 
 
 nsXsxss 
 
 aaiss 
 
 G.D. 
 
 fioTQVOlV 
 
 
 daxgvoiv 
 
 nsXsxsoiv 
 
 aoTsoiv 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 fiorgv-sg, 
 
 vg 
 
 ddxgvcc 
 
 nsXsx-ssg, sig 
 
 OtGTS-Ot, 7] 
 
 G. 
 
 fioTQVCJV 
 
 
 daxgvcav 
 
 nsXsxs-av 
 
 CCO T SCO V 
 
 D. 
 
 (30TQV(U 
 
 
 SdxgVGl 
 
 nsXsxsoi 
 
 aoTsoi 
 
 A. 
 
 fioTQV-ag, 
 
 vg 
 
 ddxgvct 
 
 TtsXsx-sag, sig 
 
 a or sot, aatTj 
 
 V. 
 
 fioTQV-sg, vg 
 
 ddxgva 
 
 nsXsx-ssg, sig 
 
 ccois-a, 7]. 
 
 7. Roots in a. 
 
 Nominative adds a. 6 66s, jackal, G. dcoos, 
 D. 6ot, A. 66a, V. 66s, Dual 66e, 66otv, PL 
 66es, G. 66cov, D. 6aai, A. 66as, V. 66es. 
 
 8. Anomalous. 
 
 There are two nouns of this declension, from 
 roots in a with the digamma. 
 
 f) vavs, a ship, (root va, vaFs, va^, Lat. na- 
 vis,) G. ve6s, D. vnt, A. vavv, V. vav, Dual 
 vrjs, veolv, PL vijss, vs6v, vaval, vuvs, vijss. 
 
 tj ygavs, an old woman, (root yga, ygaFs, 
 ygavs,) G. ygaos, D. ygat, A. ygavv, V. ygav. 
 PL N. V. ygass ygavs, G. ygaav, D. ygavci, 
 A. ygaas ygavs. 
 
44 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 § 29. EXERCISES ON THE THIRD 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 1. Mute and Liquid Nouns. 
 c O dycov tov Xeovtos xal tcov xvvcov. 'Ev t« 
 cfTopaTi tov xoXaxog Iotlv log. c H Tvgavvlg ddi- 
 xiag p/T^o ioiiv. c O dsthog rijs naTgiSog ngodo- 
 Trfs iaztv. Ol dyadol dvSgsg Osav slxoveg slow. 
 c O dsog ion cpm. Td ngdy^iaTa tuv dvdgcov 
 ioiiv iv x E 9 at T ® v duipdvoov. c H asXijvq xal ol 
 dojsges slot Xapjiddsg Tijg vvxTog. c O Zsvg i\v 
 7iaTi}g t6v 8ai[x6vcdv xal dva% dvdgcov. * H dcpgo- 
 Ovvq to eg dvOgccnioig 2J(piy§ ioTtv. Trj yaOTegi 
 ovx sOTiv d)Ta. 
 
 2. Pure Nouns. 
 Nvv 1(jti xgcaig tov xocpov tovtov. Uagd 
 TOig ' ' EXh\div sxlxtov -qoav Tgcrjgeig. c H qpvdLS 
 oivev [.laOijdscos ioTi TvcpXov. c O NzlXog e%et 
 (has) TtavToia /ivy l/Ovcov. Kigdrf novi^gd 
 IdTiv asl fyfjiia. XolXztzov to yqgdg idTiv dvdga- 
 noig fidgos. c H Mavdavij i^v ' AdTvdyovs dv- 
 yaTr/g, fiaoiXias tcov Mi'fiav. H^co iciTi dvyd- 
 Tijg Tijg dg{.iov tag. ' Eotl nXijOog tcjv fioTgvav iv 
 Totg d^nteX(D6Lv fyicov. Td Tuyr\ Trjs noXscog 
 Iotlv vvjijXd xal LO%vgd. 
 
 3. Promiscuous Exercises on the Third 
 Declension. 
 
 ' O OdvaTog ioTt SidXvdis tt(S \}w/rjs xal tov 
 dcofiazog. c Sis ol doTtgeg scctlv ovgavov xoGfiog, 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 45 
 
 ovtos ol olxqTogss xlios zrjs nolscos. Tovtq 
 iaxiv bveidos ddavazov. To %icpo$ sgtlv iv toXv 
 
 %SQOLV TTjS [ITjTQOS. Ol OCpSIS TOV IOV Iv TOlS 
 
 odovoiv s%ov(jiv (have). *Ev Boicoticl dvo iciTiv 
 iitiorj^ia 6027, to fiiv (the one) KiOaigav, to 8i 
 (the other) ' EXixav. C H ic%vs tcov dsikcov iaxiv 
 iv nooi. r Htfav tcevts Tgujgsis iv Xifiivi ixeivcp. 
 "OnXov Xiovaiv iaxiv dXxtf, ravgois xigaza, tols 
 avdgdoi Xoyos xal oocpla. 
 
 % 30. EXERCISES IN ALL THE DE- 
 CLENSIONS. 
 
 1. Al xxtftfSLS rijs dgsTrjs [xovai fiiftaiai slow. 
 "H Ttaidsla iv fiiv tcus si>Tv%iais xodfios iaiti/ r 
 iv di tccis drv^iacs xaTCKpvyjj. Al Movtiai Aids 
 xal 31vr}[A,ocivv7}s dvyaziges slow. c O Aivos r^v 
 naig c Eg[xov xal Movdys Ovgavias. JTvvai^l 
 xoapos rj Giyij ioiiv. Tea vzods ' Hcpaiaxov fjdav 
 %cdkoL 'Agyos 6 TtavQTtT7\s efysv ofifxaxa iv oXa 
 xS aSfiaxi. c H Aiyvnxos dagov ion rov Nsi- 
 Xov. Hovos evxkeias naTrfg. Al <P6gxov Ov- 
 yaregss rjoav ygaiai ix ysvsjijs. O 'Egfxrjs, 
 Maias xal Aids wos, y\v dyyeXos tcov Oscov xal 
 xrjgv£ tov noLTgos. 
 
 2. English into Greek. 
 
 A divinity. J king. Of a divinity. Of a 
 
 king. Of the divinity. Of the king. Of the 
 
 divinities. Of the kings. The son of the king. 
 
 The father of the king. A daughter of the king., 
 
 4 
 
46 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 A lion. The teeth of the lion. The light of day. 
 The stars of night. The tongue of the flatterer 
 (xo'Aa|). The water of life. The waters of the 
 river. There are fishes in the sea. Minerva 
 ^AQnva) was the daughter of Jupiter (rjv Ovya- 
 zijq, not i\ dvydjjjg). Latona (Ay\T&) was moth- 
 er of Apollo and Diana ('Aqts(als). Io was the 
 daughter of Inachus. 
 
 § 31. ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 1. These have usually two, sometimes but one 
 termination, and conform in their inflexion to 
 nouns of the same ending and gender. Their 
 inflexion, therefore, will create no difficulty. 
 
 2( 6 r\ awowv. to awoov, foolish. 
 
 ( Ur. tov T?j£ tov acpQoroQ, O&C. 
 
 So comparatives in car, except that they contract ova into 
 
 oj, and ovsg and ovug into ovg ; as, y.u£ova (iBiQw, fisi^ovsg and 
 
 [isl£ovag fxsl^ovg. 
 
 o £ o r] aXrj&rjg, to aXrj&sg, true. 
 
 ' ( G. tov Ttjg tov aXij&eog aXq&ovg, &C 
 
 . i 6 t) uggnv, to ugotv, male. 
 
 4. tip, ev { n ' \r V J v, , o _ 
 
 ( vj. tov Ti]g tov uggsvog, O&C. 
 
 r ^ot) i'doig, to I'dgi, skilful. 
 
 I G. tov Ttjg tov vdgiog, &-C. 
 
 So Tig, ivho, tI, G. Ttvog, D. tIvl, A. Tiva tI. Dual tLve, 
 tIvolv. PI. Tivtg Tiva, G. tivuv, D. tloi, A. Tivag Tiva. 
 
 6. So vg, v, G. vog, — (og, og, G. ogog, — ovg, ovv, G. odog, 
 — ig, i, G. nog, — ag, av, G. uviog. 
 
 7, Some adjectives are compounded with 
 substantives, as fxaxgoxstg, long handed. Some 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 47 
 
 in cog, as dnding, without father, and others 
 have but one termination, being used only in 
 the masculine and feminine. 
 
 § 32. EXERCISES ON ADJECTIVES OF 
 TWO TERMINATIONS. 
 
 ' H yy\ (tcpaigosLSrjs iazcv. *I?7ta[iiv6vS as na- 
 jgos r\v dcpavovs. ' H UixeXia sail vijctos ev(po- 
 gos xal evdaificov. f O dfiadrjs TtXovaios idri ngo- 
 ftarov ^gvao^iaXXov, Ovxos 6 dvrjg ty analog 
 Teal d[itfTcog. Ovx dacpaXss rots Ovrfzois to vipos. 
 f H Asgvaia vdga zl%zv v7tsg(Asys0ss dapa, xs- 
 (paXds di ivvia, xds fiiv 6xr(o dv-qjas, t^V di 
 [lictrfv dOdvarov. Evysvss nal sirysvav yovicov ! 
 ' O tov gijTogos Xoyos nlrfgrfs soil nudovs. 
 
 % 33. ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST 
 AND THIRD DECLENSIONS. 
 
 Of this class are the following adjective and 
 participial terminations. 
 
 C nag, all, naaa, nav, (root navx, navxa, 
 1. ag, aaa, av < ndvxaa, navx.) 
 
 ' G. navxog, 7idar t g, navxog. 
 
 ag, aiva, av 
 
 { fielag, fisXaiva, pilar, black. 
 
 G. [islavog, fisXalvfjg, fxiXavog. 
 
 {TV71X03V, XVTIXOVaa, XV7ZXOV (r. XVTXXOVXy f. 
 xvnxovxaa.) 
 G. xvnxovxog, xvnxovayg, xvnxovxog, striking. 
 So contracted forms in scov. tear s'ovaa iov, G. iovxog, &c. 
 av ovaa ovv, ovvxog. 
 
48 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 {dsixvvg, duxv\ 
 dsixvvvtaa.] 
 G.deixrvvrog,( 
 
 )g, deiitvvoa, deixvvv, (r. dsiuvwr, f. 
 
 > '. 
 
 dsixrvorjg, dEixvvvxog, shotting. 
 
 C Tvq>&elg, xvcf&Eloa, xvcp&iv, (r. xvcp&Evx, 
 
 5. fig, siaa, ev < f. xvySivxaa.) [struck. 
 
 ( G. Tvcp&eviog, xvcp&Eiorjg, xvcp&ivxog, being 
 
 {Xaglfig, xuqUoou, %agiEv, comely, (r. %a- 
 giEiX.) 
 G. %ocQMVTog, %agiEGoi]g, %agiEvxog. 
 So contracted forms in osig. oug oEooa oev, G. oEvxog,&LC. 
 ovg ovGoa ovv, ovvxog. 
 
 dovg, dovoa, dov, (r. dovx, dovxoa, dovT,) 
 having given, 
 dovxog, dovoijg, dovxog, &C. 
 
 XEivcpcag, xExvyvta, xEXVCpog, (r. xExvcpox,) 
 having struck. 
 
 G. TETVCpOTOg, TETVCpvlag, TETVCpOTOg. 
 
 EGTOog, EGTwoa, koxwg, (r. eaiaoTf contr. 
 
 Editor,) standing. 
 G. EOTurog, foxcoorjg, koxcoxog. 
 
 ftga/vg, figa%E7a, figa%v, short. 
 G. fiQO.%Eog, figaxslag, figa%iog. 
 
 xigqv, xsgsiva, xsgEV, tender. 
 
 7. ovg, ovoa, 
 
 Jdovg, 
 hai 
 G. to 
 
 . «£, via, og < 
 
 9. ag, (ooa, wg 
 
 10. 
 
 vg, Eia, v 
 
 j xigijv, xsgsi 
 \ G. xigEVog, 
 
 11. riv, ElVU, EV < . 
 
 ( Ij. xsgsvog, TEgEiV) t g, xEgEVog. 
 
 12. As specimens of the above, we decline 
 the following. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 nag 
 
 naoa 
 
 nav 
 
 
 N. ndvxEg 
 
 naoai 
 
 nuvxa 
 
 G. 
 
 navxog 
 
 ndoTjg 
 
 navxog 
 
 
 G. ndvxav 
 
 naocov 
 
 ndvxoiv 
 
 D. 
 
 nuvxl 
 
 naGTj 
 
 navxl 
 
 
 D. ndoi 
 
 ndouig 
 
 nuot, 
 
 A. 
 
 TXUVXU 
 
 ndoav 
 
 nav 
 
 
 A. navxag 
 
 ndoag 
 
 ndvxa 
 
 V. 
 
 nag 
 
 nuoa 
 
 nav 
 
 
 V. ndviEg 
 
 naoai 
 
 ndvxa 
 
 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 
 
 N. A. 
 
 V. ndvxE 
 
 naoa ndvxs 
 
 
 
 
 G. D. 
 
 ndvxoiv ndaaiv ndvxoiv 
 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 49 
 
 Sweet. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. r)dvg rjdsla rjdv N. rjd-ssg, slg rjdslai rjdsa 
 
 G. rjdsog rjdslag rjdsog G. rjdioav rjdstwv rjdsav 
 
 D. r)d-s'i, si rjdsla. rjd-s'i, si D. rjdsoi rjdsiaig rjdsoi 
 
 A. r)dvv rjdslav rjdv A. r)d-sag, slg rjdslag rjdsa 
 
 V. r)dv rjdsla rjdv V. rjd-ssg, slg rjdslai rjdsa 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. rjdss rjdsla r)dss 
 G. D. rjdioiv rjdsiaiv rjdsoiv 
 
 xsxvqpag. 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 TSTvep-ojg, via, 6g 
 
 N. 
 
 xsxvcp-oxsg, vlat, ota 
 
 G. 
 
 xsxvcp-oxog, vlag, oxog 
 
 G. 
 
 XSXVOp-OXOiV, VICOV, OTOJV 
 
 D. 
 
 xsxvcp-oxi, via, 0X1 
 
 D. 
 
 xsxvcp-ooi, vlaig, oat, 
 
 A. 
 
 xsxvcp-6xa, vlav, 6g 
 
 A. 
 
 xsxvcp-oxag, vlag, 6xa 
 
 V. 
 
 xsxvcp-ojg, via, 6g 
 
 V. 
 
 xsxvcp-oxsg, vlat, oxa 
 
 
 D 
 
 nal. 
 
 
 
 N. A. V. XSXVCp- 
 
 oxs, via, oxs 
 
 
 G. D. XSXVCp- 
 
 OXO IV, 
 
 vlaiv, oxolv 
 
 Remark. The student should be exercised 
 in giving the roots of adjectives and participles, 
 and explaining the laws of the changes, as far 
 as they are obvious. As in nds, the form of the 
 feminine throughout; as, navraa ndaa, ndviarfs 
 ndrnp, ndvTGcus itdaais, the Dat. PI. Mas. ndvx- 
 <jl Ttdat. In tv71tcov TvuTOvxaa. TV7trov(ja, tv- 
 
 mOVTGl TV7tT0VCiL, TV7ZTOVT6CUS TV71TOVGCUS. 
 
 § 34. SOME IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. Meyas, great, and noXvs, much, derive all 
 their cases except the Masculine and Neuter 
 of the Nom., Ace, and Voc, Sing., from the ob- 
 solete TtoXXos and {leydXos. 
 
50 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 Slug, noXvg nolh] noXv N. psyag (ityuXi) fiiya 
 
 G. noXX-ov -i]g -ov G. [xeyuX-ov -t]q -ov 
 
 D. noXX-co -jj -o) D. f.ieydX-0) -y -ip 
 
 A. ttoXvv noXXijv noXv A. (.liyav [itydXrjv (xsycc 
 
 V. noXv noXXtj noXv V. fisya [xsydXr} fisya 
 
 Dual noXX-o) -a -w Dual (.leydX-on -a -w 
 
 -olv -ouv -oXv -olv -aiv -olv 
 
 PL noXX-ol -at -w, &c. PL [j.sydX-01 -at -a,&c. 
 
 2. Numerals. 
 
 N. slg (one) plot IV So ovdelg, ovdsfxta, ovdsv, no one. 
 G. krog fxidg srog {.ii]deig, (.n^defiia, (Arjdev. 
 
 D. kvl pia evl 
 
 A. k'va (ilav ev 
 
 TQslg (three), rgla, G. tqloov, D. tqioi, A. TQslg, tqlcc. 
 iiaoaQsg (four), riaaaga, G. Tsooagwv, D. TtaoaooL, A. tsoocc- 
 gag, Tiaoaga. 
 
 § 35. EXERCISES ON ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. Adjectives of the First and Third 
 Declensions. 
 
 Bga%ua jigyjLs qSovqs xaxijs. JBga^vs 6 
 fitos, ij de ts%v7] paxgd. Sevocpav h'%£i [islavas 
 i7t7iovs, xal [xiXava, bitXa, xal ndaav ti\v iodijja 
 [xiXaivav. "Auav to aco^d ioTt {.dXav. c H f,id- 
 X,a s%£i dcffiqv %agu(j(jav. To dea^ia tcqv f.ield- 
 vcdv onXcov i)v %aguv. Uatimv tcov dgejcov i)y&- 
 [lav idziv r( evosfieia. * H ykcpvgd Ictiv svgua 
 xal 6 TtOTdfios flaOvs. At Ivxolai gov fiageiou 
 ovx eiOlv. *Ey(o ixav etfii ayyeXos Gov. l H fxiv 
 xogi} Tsgeivd ftfre, id 8s avdij rigsva. 
 
 2. Promiscuous Exercises on Adjectives. 
 
 Trjg 7Zoud£ias at f.iiv gi'Cat ntxgai etcfiv, ot 8i 
 
 xagjiol yXvxus. Els ion Oedg xal ovx h'tiiiv 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 51 
 
 aXXos nXtfv avxov. Kaxov xigSos, fiagv xsiprf- 
 Xiov. OvSsls dStxos sctzac [ioi cplXos. c O dtxcuos 
 [aovos Itfrt fiaxdgios. c O Uagvacfdos [niya, zal 
 dvdxiov ogos iajiv. Koivd itixi rd x-n^tara tSv 
 cpiXcov. c O [xiv Ssgidixos noXvs idrcv, ol Si igyd- 
 rcu oXiyoi. Ovvtos fiiv ovdsls Idxiv svSaipav 
 dvtfg. 'Papn fxexd [iiv (pgovrfosas &q>ihip,dss 
 dvev 8i xavxvs fikafisgd. Ol Xoyoi aov dXndus 
 sitii Ttal fisfiouot ycal ogdoL To piXi (isv yhvxv, 
 yXvxaia Si i\ docpia. 
 
 3. English into Greek. 
 Thy icords are true and just. Thy name 
 (ovo^ia) is holy. The house is beautiful. This 
 is a beautiful house. Mortal life is not always 
 happy. Virtue is a strong weapon. Virtue is 
 useful (xgrftojtos) and lasting. A little time. 
 Much time. Among (iv) many men there are 
 many minds. Olympus was a lofty {vxpnXos) 
 mountain. The waters are full of fishes. In the 
 mountains are many and great animals. The 
 body is mortal, but the soul immortal (to aco(xa 
 [xiv, i} ipv%rj Si). 
 
 § 36. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. Adjectives are regularly compared by 
 adding to the root isgos and xarog ; as, 
 
 svgv (N. svgvg) svgv-Tsgog, xaxog. 
 
 fioatag (y,dxag) fiaydg-jsgog, icczog. 
 
 fislocv (fAEXag) [izkdv-xEgog, xaxog. 
 
 yXeivo (xXsivog) xXsivo-xsgog, xaxog. 
 
 oocfo (aocpog) oocpw-xsgog, xaxog. 
 
52 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 Like aocpog all adjectives in o with a short 
 penult. 
 
 2. Sometimes ct, introduced to strengthen 
 the form (see also § 47, 5.), makes ctisgog and 
 drarog, which, increased by f, becomes iaiegog 
 and itiraxog. These latter forms again, by a 
 change frequent in the Greek language, become 
 taregog and iaxaTog. Thus, 
 
 aXr\&E (aXrj&ijg) aX^&i-oxsgog, axaxog. 
 
 obicpgov (oiocpQOJv) owipoov-Eoxsoog, soxaxog. 
 aonay (agnas) agnay-loxsgog, ioxaxog. 
 
 3. The above terminations are affixed some- 
 times with the omission of o, sometimes of other 
 letters. The following are given as specimens. 
 
 cpiXo {epilog) cpiX-xsgog, xaxog, and cpiXal-xsgog, xaxog. 
 
 ysgaio {ysgaiog) ysgal-xsgog, xaxog. 
 
 naXaio (naXaiog) naXal-xsgog, xaxog. 
 
 anXoo (anXoog) anXo-soxsgog, iaxaxog. 
 
 XaXo (XdXog) XaX-loxsgog, laraxog. 
 
 nevTjx (nevrjg) nsv-saxsgog, soxaxog. 
 
 4. Some adjectives in vs, and some in gog 
 (dropping the g), make their comparisons in 
 lvdv and idxog ; as, ijdvg, r\8lcov, ijdujTog • aiti%gog, 
 ald%LG)v, ai'G/ictTog. In a few comparatives, the 
 i, with the preceding consonant, is changed 
 into aa or tt ; as, iXayvg, iXdactcov, eXdytajog • 
 zayvg (day), Odocfcov, zd%ic>Tog. 
 
 % 37. IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 
 
 1. 
 
 xaXog xaXXiwv xaXXioxog 
 
 xaxog xaxioiv xaxioxog 
 
 XEtgwv xelgioxog 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 53 
 
 [isyag 
 TtoXvg 
 
 
 TtXelwv 
 
 [xeyiGTog 
 nXuGTog 
 
 ccya&og 
 
 
 a(xuv(xiv 
 fisXrliav 
 
 (XQLOTOg 
 
 fiiXnoTog 
 
 
 
 xqsIttcov 
 Xomv 
 
 XQUTlOTOg 
 
 Xwaxog 
 
 From 
 
 prepositions. 
 
 
 71 Q 6 
 
 
 TlQOTfQOg 
 
 TTQOJTOg 
 
 VTISQ 
 
 
 VTTegrsQog 
 
 VTZSQTCtTOg 
 
 Adver 
 
 bs are 
 
 compared. 
 
 
 avoi 
 
 
 aV(OTEQ(0 
 
 avaraxbn 
 
 adim 
 
 
 XttT(OT£Q(0 
 
 %CtT(tiT(XT(ti 
 
 I'|w 
 
 
 O-WTSQG) 
 
 elwTKTW 
 
 law 
 
 
 iotaxiQO) 
 
 iacjTclxco 
 
 Irreg. paXa 
 
 [ioiXXov 
 
 [IttXlOTCt 
 
 § 38. EXERCISES ON COMPARISON. 
 
 Ovdiv XTJjpa aigsTarsgdv iatt zrjs agsTrjs. 
 Ovdiv taxi ylvxiov Trjs nargtSos. Jstvoxdi^ rcov 
 Q-qgLCdv idrlv -q dpaQia. c O ddvazos xoivos xai 
 (both) iocs xugioTois xal tois fiaXjiGTOis* e O 
 xgox6dec?,os l| IXa^idTov ytyvsTCU (becomes) [ts- 
 yidTos * to fiiv ydg coov ov [iu'£ov iaxc yi]vziov^ 
 avzos 3i yiyverou Inxd xai §S7cd7tt[%vs. Ugsofiv- 
 xaxov t&v ovtcov, Oeos * dyivvtjTOS ydg • xdXXi- 
 azov xo6[jlos ' noiriiia ydg dsov. Tis idzi [ist- 
 £cov iv jjj fiadiXeia t&v ovgavcov ; Uocpla tcXov- 
 tov xzrjfia zifAiazegov. c H (pQoyrjdis xai i\ vyi- 
 eia fisyidza rots dvdgaitois dyadd. ' H xlsivo- 
 zdzy\ rtofos iv ' EXXddt -qv 3 ^4drjvai. JUcdxgdzrfs 
 docpwzazog qv zSv cpiXodoycov xai dcocpgovidza- 
 zos. 3 H JZixskta Ttaaav rcov vvfiav xgaztdzrj 
 
54 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 lax iv. zfo^a eotlv dadevjjs ayxvga, tzXovtos hi 
 dodsvsGiega. 
 
 Remarks. 1. After comparatives, the Gen- 
 itive is used ; as, dixouoTSQos ifiov, more just 
 than I; otherwise the particle r\, than, is em- 
 ployed ; as, tovto [ioi pakkov dgstixst 7} cot, this 
 pleases me more than thee. 
 
 2. After superlatives, interrogatives, &,c, the 
 Genitive Plural is used. 
 
 I 39. THE VERB. 
 
 Such is the fullness and perfection of the 
 Greek verb, so varied, and yet so philosophical 
 and simple its structure, that the study of it 
 furnishes one of the most delightful, profitable, 
 and important exercises to the Greek student. 
 We shall, therefore, treat it at considerable 
 length. 
 
 1. The Greek Transitive Verb has three 
 voices, Active, Passive, and Middle. The Mid- 
 dle has but four tenses peculiar to itself, and 
 as these follow in their formation the analogy 
 of the Passive, or rather are, in form, strictly 
 passive tenses, we shall, in inflexion, make but 
 two voices, active and passive. 
 
 2„ The Greek verb has six moods, the in- 
 dicative, subjunctive, optative, imperative, infin- 
 itive, and participle. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 55 
 
 3. Strictly speaking, the subjunctive and opta- 
 tive form but one mood. They both state the ac- 
 tion of the verb conditionally, the subjunctive be- 
 ing the conditional mood for the primary tenses 
 to which it is allied in formation, the optative, 
 for the secondary or past tenses ; as, xvnxa tW 
 tctslvcj, I strike that I may slay; sivipa iva. 
 xT£ii>cu[M, I struck that I might slay. They 
 might, perhaps, not improperly be named con- 
 ditional present and conditional past, or primary 
 conditional and secondary conditional. The 
 name optative arises from a single and seconda- 
 ry, though not unfrequent, use of the mood, 
 which in its original and ordinary use is purely 
 subjunctive. The other moods need no partic- 
 ular remark. 
 
 § 40. THE TENSES. 
 
 1. The tenses represent the action of the 
 verb in two respects; 1. its time; 2. its state. 
 The confounding of these distinct elements has 
 occasioned much confusion in grammar. 
 
 2. Time has three divisions, past, present, 
 and future. No others are possible. But in 
 each of these divisions of time an action may 
 be regarded with reference to its state, as con- 
 tinuing or completed, or simply as taking place 
 without reference either to continuance or com- 
 pletion. A complete scheme of the tenses, 
 then, would make nine ; thus, 
 
56 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 Present Time. 
 I am striking. Going on or imperfect 
 I have struck. Completed or perfect, 
 I strike. Simply taking place or absolute. 
 
 Past Time. 
 I was striking. Imperfect. 
 I had struck. Perfect. 
 I struck. Absolute. 
 
 Future Time. 
 I shall be striking. Imperfect. 
 I shall have struck. Perfect. 
 I shall strike. Absolute. 
 
 3. The name of a tense, then, should express 
 both its time and its state. Thus Itvtixov, I ivas 
 striking, is imperfect, but so also is tv7Ttg>, I am 
 striking. The one is an imperfect in present 
 time, or an imperfect present, the other in past 
 time, or an imperfect past. So xizvcpa, I have 
 struck, is a perfect present* hsivcpsiv, I had 
 struck, a perfect past. We have then an im- 
 perfect present, past, and future, (I am striking, 
 I ivas striking, I shall be striking) ; a perfect 
 present, past, and future, (/ have struck, I had 
 
 * That this is the true character and designation of this tense, an inspec- 
 tion of the above table, and a careful examination of its nature, will, we think, 
 clearly show. / have struck evidently sustains the same relation to / am 
 striking, that / had struck sustains to i" was striking. But the two latter 
 are clearly an imperfect and perfect past ; the two former, then, are an im- 
 perfect and perfect present. That is, / am striking (rv-rru) represents an 
 action now going on; I frave struck (riru$oi), an action now completed. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 57 
 
 struck, I .shall have struck) ; and an absolute or 
 indefinite (aorist) present, past, and future, (I 
 strike, I struck, I shall strike.) 
 
 4. Of these nine tenses, the Greek verb has 
 in the active voice distinct forms for six, in the 
 passive, for seven ; thus, 
 
 Present. 
 xvitTco, I am striking. Imperfect, 
 Thvcpa, I have struck. Perfect. 
 
 Past. 
 hvnjov, I was striking. Imperfect. 
 hsjvcpBLv, I had struck. Perfect. 
 hvipa, I struck. Absolute or Jlorist. 
 
 Future. 
 Tv\pco,Ishall strike or be striking. Absolute usually. 
 Pass. TSTvyjopou, I shall have been struck. Perfect. 
 
 5. The past tenses are more completely devel- 
 oped than either the present or future, for the ob- 
 vious reason, that all history and narration being 
 of events in past time, more minute specifica- 
 tion is here demanded, and therefore a separate 
 form exists for the absolute or aorist. The past 
 tenses are hence often called historical tenses. 
 
 It matters not whether, in point of fact, it is only at this moment com-, 
 pleted, or whether the writer only chooses to represent it so. In accord- 
 ance with this view is the fact, that both in Greek and Latin the syntactical 
 construction of the perfect is the same with that of the so called present. 
 This tense has ever been a stumblingblock to the grammarians, and they 
 have generally contented themselves with describing it as a past tense, but. 
 connected either in itself or in its consequences with the present time. 
 
 5 
 
58 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 6. It is seen, that, in the present and future 
 divisions of time, the Greek verb has not sep- 
 arate forms for the imperfect and the absolute. 
 For these it employs the same tenses, while in 
 the present the imperfect meaning preponder- 
 ates, in the future, the absolute meaning. Their 
 ordinary significations, then, are as follows. 
 
 Present Time. 
 ivtctcd, I am striking. Imperfect. 
 TVTtTco, I strike. Absolute. 
 
 TSTvcpa, I have struck. Perfect. 
 
 Past Time. 
 hv7tTov, I was striking. Imperfect. 
 hvya, I struck. Absolute or Jiorist. 
 
 hsTvysiv, I had struck. Perfect. 
 
 Future Time. 
 Tvxpco, I shall be striking (rare). Imperfect. 
 rvyjco, I shall strike (its usual meaning). Absolute. 
 Pass. TSTvipo[xcu, I shall have been struck. Perfect. 
 
 7. We shall, then, in designating the tenses, 
 as there is but one future act, call it the future, 
 and the absolute past, designated by its ordi- 
 nary name of aorist. The other tenses we shall 
 designate as the imperfect present (tvtctco) and 
 the perfect present (rirf^a), the imperfect past 
 (hvnzov) and the perfect past (heivyeLv). 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 59 
 
 § 41. THE TENSES CONTINUED. 
 
 1. The Greek verb has, it is seen, in the 
 active voice six tenses. For four of these, 
 namely, the future and aorist, perfect present, 
 and perfect past, it has two forms, an earlier 
 and shorter, and a later and fuller form. The 
 earliest forms of the tenses may be supposed 
 to have been the following, tvttco, I strike, 
 sTvnov, I struck, jhvna, I have struck, heiv- 
 nuv, I had struck, xvitka, I will strike. In the 
 progress of the language, zvTtco is lengthened 
 into tvutco, and tvitm becomes obsolete. From 
 TV7tra is formed hvizrov, with a fuller signifi- 
 cation, i" was striking, while stvtcov remains 
 with its common meaning, / struck. Tvipa 
 takes the place of xvtzsco, and in connexion with 
 Tvxpo is formed hvxpa, as a more common form 
 of the aorist ; while, by aspiration, Thv7ta be- 
 comes Tsivcpa, and of course hexvuecv becomes 
 
 §T6TVCpSlV. 
 
 2. Thus the scheme becomes : 
 
 Present Tenses. 
 TUTtxa. Imperfect. 
 
 TETVTta. Earlier Perfect. 
 Tsxvcpa. Later Perfect. 
 
 Past Tenses. 
 Itvtztov. Imperfect. 
 Ixvnov. Earlier Aorist. 
 
 zzvxpa. Later Aorist. 
 
60 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 hsxvTtsLv. Earlier Perfect. 
 hsTvcpuv. Later Perfect. 
 
 Future Tenses. 
 TVTtsa. Earlier Future. 
 
 zvxpa. Later Future. 
 
 3. The passive and middle voices have in 
 the future and aorist the same variety of forms, 
 and, in all the voices, the tenses may be ranked 
 in pairs, 
 tion; thus: 
 
 according to their connexion in forma- 
 
 Active. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Imp. Pres. 
 Imp. Past 
 
 ETVTttOV 
 
 TVTttOfXai 
 
 iiVTiToprjV 
 
 
 Ear. Fut. 
 
 rime (a 
 
 Tvnrjoofuxi 
 
 Tvneofiai 
 
 Ear. Aor. 
 
 iivnov 
 
 frvnrjv 
 
 ervno^v 
 
 Lat. Fut. 
 Lat. Aor. 
 
 TVlf/b) 
 
 iivipa 
 
 TV(pdr,O0[iCU 
 
 TVlpOfAai 
 ETVlpd^V 
 
 Ear. Perf. Pres. 
 Ear. Perf. Past 
 
 rsxvTia 
 (tetvtkiv 
 
 TETV(JL^aL 
 iTETl'llfiljV 
 
 
 Lat. Perf. Pres. 
 Lat. Perf. Past 
 
 xtivcpa 
 ixnvqjsiv 
 
 
 
 Perf. Fut. 
 
 
 ISIVWOUUI 
 
 
 4. In most verbs, the earlier forms were 
 never in use, or have become obsolete. In 
 some, however, they have retained their places, 
 and in a few, side by side with the later forms. 
 Generally, however, and particularly in the fu- 
 ture and aorist, where one is found the other is 
 wanting, and sometimes euphony, and often, per- 
 haps, accident, may have determined between 
 them. The earlier future is found only in liquid 
 verbs, in which it is almost exclusively used. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 61 
 
 § 42. FORMATION OF THE TENSES. 
 AUGMENT. 
 
 1. Each tense may, in general, be divided 
 into three parts ; the prefix, the root, and the 
 termination. We shall consider them in their 
 order. 
 
 2. The prefix is of two kinds, and employed 
 for distinct purposes. In all the past tenses 
 the Greeks prefixed to the root s, to indicate 
 past time ; and in all the perfect tenses they 
 prefixed the initial consonant with s, to indicate 
 perfect action. 
 
 Past Tenses, 1-xvtitov, i-xs-xvystv, s-xvyja. 
 Perf. Tenses. xs-xvcpa, i-xs-xv(p£iv, xe-xvyjofiai. 
 
 3. The prefix of the past tenses (s) is called 
 the augment ; that of the perfect tenses is 
 called the reduplication. One of these tenses 
 (ixsxvcpEiv, I had struck,) is a perfect past, i. e. 
 a perfect tense in past time ; it therefore takes 
 both the augment and the reduplication. The 
 prefixes then stand thus. Root xvn, Past e-xv7t, 
 Perf. xe-xvti, Perf. Past s-xs-xv7t. 
 
 4. It is thus clear, why the so called pluper- 
 fect receives both prefixes. It is a perfect past. 
 From the above principles, it also follows, that 
 the augment of the past tenses is found only in the 
 indicative, while the reduplication of the perfect 
 tenses continues through all the moods. For the 
 
 5* 
 
62 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 past tenses express past time only in the in- 
 dicative, while the perfect tenses express per- 
 fect action through all the moods. 
 
 5. When the verb begins with a consonant, 
 the augment suffers no change, and is called 
 syllabic. In verbs beginning with a vowel, it 
 coalesces with the vowel in the following man- 
 ner ; sa into ij, as idxovov rjxovov • so into «, 
 as iofitXsov cofiiXsov * ss into ?^, sskni'Cov jjkm- 
 tov, and sometimes into si, as ss%ov si%ov. So 
 the diphthongs av and sv into tjv, as savkovv 
 iqvXovv, izv%6[i7]v y\vy6prv, and ai, 01, into y, a, 
 as saixovv rfxovv, soixovv wxouv. This is call- 
 ed the temporal augment. Many verbs, how- 
 ever, neglect it, and verbs in ov, si, -q, co, ~i, D, 
 with a few exceptions, never take it. 
 
 6. Verbs beginning with a vowel admit, of 
 course, no reduplication. The prefix of the 
 perfect tenses, therefore, coincides here, in 
 form, with that of the past tenses ; as, ahscd, 
 jItovv, jjzqxa. It still, however, retains its dis- 
 tinctive character, and is continued through all 
 the moods. 
 
 7. Some verbs beginning with a vowel pre- 
 fix to the perfect tenses the two first letters of 
 the root ; as, dysigco, ijysgxa, ay-7/ysgxa. This 
 is called the Attic reduplication. It often short- 
 ens the third syllable from the beginning; as, 
 ijxova, dxrjxoa, Perf. Past i\xqx6siv. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 63 
 
 8. Some verbs take s before the lengthened 
 vowel of the past and perfect tenses ; as, 
 ogda, idgav, icogdxa. 
 
 9. Verbs compounded with a preposition 
 generally take the prefix after the preposition ; 
 as ixfidkka, i^sfiaXlov (^ 9. 2), lx/3i/3A^xa. 
 KaOsvda (svda rare) makes ixddevdov and xa- 
 drfvdov, * Avogftoa makes r\v(ogQovv • ivo^Xico^ 
 
 % 43. THE ROOT. 
 
 1. Many verbs have, in the imperfects pres- 
 ent and past, a strengthened form, to which 
 the terminations are attached, while in all the 
 other tenses they are appended to the simpler 
 form called the root. In forming, then, the va- 
 rious tenses, the root must always be ascer- 
 tained, and the tenses formed by combining 
 this with the termination. Thus, root rvjt, 
 Imp. Pres. Tvmcd, Imp. Past hvuxov (strength- 
 ened by t) ; in the other tenses tvtc-oco (Tvipa), 
 s-TV7t-oa (hvxpa), ri-TVTt-fxou (t£tv ftpou),, s-tvtc- 
 &qv (iTvcpQqv), (^ 4). 
 
 2. Verbs in nx are from roots in a labial 
 mute, 7i, /3, or cp ; as, xgvTtTco, tvutco, gdmco, 
 from xgvSco. tvtcco, gdcpco. 
 
 3. Verbs in aa have generally a root in a 
 palatal, x, y, or %, the palatal being dropped 
 before aa ; as, idaaco, cpglaaco, fifcaa), from toc- 
 
64 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 yco, (pgixa, fi?txG). A few come from a lingual 
 root. 
 
 4. Verbs in ? have the root in 8 ; as, (pgd£a, 
 (pgdda (Fut. (pgdd-aco, cpgdaco). Some have it in 
 y\ as, xgd£co, ycgdyco (Fut. xgd^co). 
 
 5. The student having learned the termina- 
 tions (§ 45) should be accustomed to trace, 
 according to the principles in § 4, the forms of 
 the tenses as modified by the different roots; 
 thus : 
 
 Roots. Fut. Aor. Perf. Pres. Perf. Past. 
 
 ray- (ray-crui) ra.\ui ira^et (riruy-a) rira^a riray-fiai 
 
 <xu6- (ortid-tru) tfiiffu tTiiffa (wiirttO-a) ffivrtiKcc (vrliruO-iAat) <xizn<rft,vu 
 
 6. The pure root can be precisely ascertain- 
 ed from the earlier aorist, as here the vowel of 
 the termination makes no change in the final 
 letter of the root ; thus, Tay-, Aor. s-jay-ov. 
 From the later future or aorist Toc|a, ha£a, it 
 might indeed be ascertained, that the root was 
 a palatal, but not which, as Ta|a, might spring 
 equally from xdy-aco, rdx-aa, and zd^-ctco. So 
 with the Perfect active and passive, later Aor. 
 Pass., &c. 
 
 7. The earlier aorist is generally the shortest 
 possible form. Hence verbs in XX and (iv re- 
 ject a consonant; as, ftdXXa, Imp. Past i'/3aAAoi/, 
 Aor. sfiaXov. Diphthongs in the root reject, 
 in this tense, one of their vowels ; as, Xuttcd, 
 IXunov, Xeinoco, XsXsKpa, Aor. iXinov, Long 
 vowels are shortened ; as, fajdco, eXadov. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 65 
 
 § 44. ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 1. To many pure roots ax is attached, the 
 radical vowel lengthened, and the initial con- 
 sonant repeated with i ; as, yvo-, yvoax, yvcoax, 
 yiyvcoaxa ■ [iva~, [iifivrfaxa • rgo-, Tirgaaxco, Some 
 do not change the vowel ; as, Sga-, didgdaxa. 
 Some, beginning with a vowel, of course have 
 no reduplication, and change e or o into i; as, 
 £vgs-, evglaxco • aAo-, dXiaxo. 
 
 2. Another class of verbs attach av to the 
 root, and insert a nasal before the last conso- 
 nant ; as, pad-, [xavddvco • tv%-, Tvy%dva • Aa/3-, 
 Xa[ifidvco • Oiy-, dvyyava • kad-, kavOdva (^ 4. 
 4). 
 
 3. All these lengthened forms are found only 
 in the Imp. Pres. and Past tenses ; as, yvo- 9 
 ycyvaaxo, iyiyvaaxov, Fut. yva-aopou, e-yvaxa, 
 &c. 
 
 4. There are many anomalous verbs in Greek, 
 i. e. verbs whose tenses are derived from dif- 
 ferent roots. These different roots, the stu- 
 dent should be accustomed to trace out. Thus, 
 jrao^cj, Ear. Aor. snadov (root 7ta0-), Pres. at- 
 taches a% and drops 0, 7zd0a%cd, 7tda%a, Fut. 7ra- 
 aopac, from tcsvQ-, nsvOao^ai, nsiaotiai (^4. 7), 
 Perf. s changed into o, ttinovda • svgiaxa (see 
 above, 1), Ear. Aor. evgov (root svg-), Fut. 
 svgrjaa, Perf. svgrjxa (root evge-, § 43). 
 
66 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 ^ 45. TERMINATIONS. 
 
 Passive. Middle. 
 
 ofxai 
 
 fxai 
 
 7^ do fiat sofxac 
 
 7\V 0[H1\V 
 
 dijv dapyv 
 
 (fOfAOU 
 
 2. Example ; root ygacp-^ augment s with past 
 tenses, red. ys with perfect tenses. Let the 
 student make the requisite changes in the fol- 
 lowing. We give the tenses in the same order 
 as above. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 1. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Imp. Pres. 
 
 a 
 
 Imp. Past 
 
 ov 
 
 Perf. Pres. 
 
 a 
 
 Perf. Past 
 
 SLV 
 
 Ear. Fut. 
 
 eco 
 
 Ear. A or. 
 
 ov 
 
 Lat. Fut. 
 
 do 
 
 Lat. Aor. 
 
 da 
 
 Perf. Fut. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 YQdCp-b} 
 
 E-yqacp-ov 
 
 yi-yqacp-a 
 
 E-ys-yqucp-Eiv 
 
 yqacp-to) 
 
 {i'-yqacp-ov) * 
 
 yqucp-oco 
 
 i-yqacp-aa 
 
 yQCi<f>-OlU(U 
 
 E-yqacp-o^v 
 yi-yqncp-^iai 
 i-yE-yQ(iq)-fi7]V 
 yqaq)-rjoo[.icu 
 
 E-yQUCp-ljV 
 
 ygw(f>-&rnJotLai 
 
 E-yQMCp-dljV 
 
 yE-yguq)-(JO(X(xi 
 
 Middle. 
 
 yQoup-fo l uai 
 (s-yQ(x(p-6}ir}v) * 
 yqd(p-oo(.au 
 E-yqa<p-ua/.(Tjv 
 
 3. Let the student thus form the tenses of 
 TVTtTco, rdddco, referring to the next section for 
 rules concerning the perfect active. 
 
 * Wanting, because like the Imperfect Past active and passive. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 67 
 
 § 46. PECULIARITIES IN DIFFERENT 
 CLASSES OF VERBS. -MUTE VERBS. 
 
 1. The later perfect active is formed by as- 
 pirating the labial and palatal roots, and in Un- 
 guals it inserts x, dropping the lingual, x is 
 here to be regarded as a strong aspiration. 
 
 2. The perfect sometimes changes s into o 
 in the active, and in the passive sv into v ; as, 
 
 TQE7TCQ, TSTQO(pa ' T£V%G), TBTVy [JIOU. 
 
 3. The perfect passive frequently changes s 
 of the root into a ; as, rgeuco, Thgafzpai. So 
 the earlier aorist active, tqstzco, hgajiov. 
 
 4. Example of mute verbs ; Xs'ntco, root Xent^ 
 short km-. 
 
 Active. Passive. Middle. 
 
 Imp. Pres. Xsln-co Xsln-ofxav 
 
 Imp. Past 8-XsL7l-0V £-Xsi7l-6fl7]V 
 
 Ear. Perf. Pres. Xs-Xom-a * Xs-Xei^i-fxuL 
 
 Ear. Perf. Past i-Xs-Xoln-siv s-Xe-Xei^-^v 
 
 Lat. Perf. Pres. Xs-Xucp-u 
 
 Lat. Perf. Past i-Xs-Xelcp-siv 
 
 Ear. Fut. Xm-doi Xm-rjoofiai Xnt-so^ai 
 
 Ear. Aor. z-Xm-ov i-Xin-r]V i-Xi7i-6y,r]V 
 
 Lat. Fut. XsLi}>(a(n-G(xi) Xsiq)-&^oofiai XzLyofxailji-Gonai) 
 
 Lat. Aor. s-Xsiyja i-Xd(p-&7]y s-Xsupa^irjv 
 
 Perf. Fut. Xs-Xelipopou (n-ao^iai) 
 
 Examples for practice. 7t£i6co, ngdcfaco, ado, 
 fidmcD, hiyco. 
 
 * The earlier perfect inclines strongly to o in the root, and therefore often 
 changes s into e. 
 
68 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 § 47. PURE VERBS.* 
 
 1. Pure verbs uniformly want the earlier fu- 
 ture and aorist, unless they borrow them from 
 some obsolete, impure root ; as, atgico, Ear. 
 Aor. ukov, from ska. 
 
 2. In the perfect, they insert % before a and 
 siv, and have no earlier perfect ; as, nscpihi-xa, 
 
 i7t£(pik7J-7C£lV. 
 
 3. In all the tenses except the imperfect 
 present and past, the final vowel of the root is 
 lengthened, a and £ into ??, and o into a ; as, 
 ((piki) (pckTJ-oco, icpihj-aa, 7t£(pikr}~xa, 7t£cpikri- 
 fxai, icpLkrf-Oyv, (pikrj-tfopou, &c. 
 
 Exc. A few in a«, as idea, iadco • in kaco, 
 as y£kda ' in £co, as xakico xakiaa, T£ki(o T£kk- 
 (jco, and others, for which consult the lexicons. 
 jilgico, Aor. Pass, ygidrjv • alvico alvida, f}v£cfa, 
 
 4. Many lose a in their later future ; as, ts- 
 
 ki<J(0 T£k£CO T£kS, T£k£60[iai T£k0V{iai ' OflOOOflOU 
 
 5. Many in the passive tenses, particularly 
 when the vowel remains short, insert a to 
 strengthen the form ; as, T£T£k£6jA,ai, ij£kiad^v, 
 
 for T£T£k£(AOU, STSkidtfV. 
 
 * Verbs whose root terminates in a vowel ; as, <Qt\ia, root (f>iXs. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 69 
 
 Example. cpiXia)^ root cpiXe. 
 
 Active. 
 Imp. Pres. cpiU-w 
 
 Imp. Past i-cpds-ov 
 
 Lat. Perf. Pres. ns-cplXrj-xvt 
 Lat. Perf. Past i-ns-ydtj-xsiv 
 Lat. Fut. <pdrj-G(t) 
 
 Lat. Aor. s-cpdrj-aa 
 
 Perf. Fut. 
 
 Passive. 
 <ptXt-o[i(u 
 i-q>ds-6{ir}V 
 7iB-(f>dr\-^iav 
 i-7iE-cpdrj-y.t]V 
 q>dr]-&r)O0iA(Xi 
 i-cpd^-&r\v 
 Tis-cpdrj-oofioci 
 
 Middle. 
 
 q)drj-ao[A-at 
 s-(fd7]-ad^ir}V 
 
 Examples for practice. d^Xoa, Ttpda, ysldco, 
 
 § 48. LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 1. These form all the tenses, except the im- 
 perfects present and past, from the short root. 
 
 2. The earlier perfect frequently changes s 
 of the root into o, and lengthens other short 
 vowels ; as, xtsv-, exxova • (pav-, nkcpriva * xiX- y 
 
 TETlXa. 
 
 3. The later perfect inserts x before a and 
 sir ; as, ayah-, scxpaXxa • (pav-, nkcpayxa 
 
 ft 4 - 4 )- 
 
 4. In the perfect, active and passive, and; 
 some other tenses of dissyllabic verbs, e of the 
 root is changed into a ; oxs A-, saxalxa, eaxaX- 
 [xou, saxaXov, iaxdhrfv, ioxdkdqv • ne ig-, neg-, 
 ninagxa, nknag^ai^ lndgQT\v, snagov, iitdgrfv. 
 
 5. These verbs want the later future in cfco ; 
 and the aorist in a they make without a, length- 
 ening a of the root into -q or d, and s into sc ;, 
 
 6 
 
70 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 CTskkco, root are}.-, Ear. Fut. aieXia, Ear. Aor. 
 eaxaXov, Lat. Aor. eazeiXa • (paivco, root gsai/-, 
 Fut. (pavia, Ear. Aor. ecpavov, Lat. Aor. Eipqva. 
 
 6. The verbs xgivco, xXivco, xtelvo, tslvco, 
 tcXvvco make the following tenses. 
 
 xixqXxa 
 
 XSXQlflCCl 
 
 ixQl'&7]V 
 
 xsxXixa 
 
 xsxXipai 
 
 exXl&r^v 
 
 txxaxa 
 
 ixxa^ai 
 
 ixxa&i]V 
 
 tiiaxa 
 
 TSTUftaL 
 
 fru&riv 
 
 nknXvxa 
 
 nenXvfiai 
 
 inlv&rjv. 
 
 7. Example. OTsXla. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Imp. Pres. 
 
 otsXXw 
 
 OTiXX-ofuai 
 
 
 Imp. Past 
 
 b-gtsXXov 
 
 e-GxsXX-6^r t v 
 
 
 Ear. Perf. Pres. 
 
 s-aroX-a 
 
 e-GiaX-pai 
 
 
 Ear. Perf. Past 
 
 i-GToX-SlV 
 
 s-OTaX-ji'tjv 
 
 
 Lat. Perf. Pres. 
 
 t-GraX-xa 
 
 
 
 Lat. Perf. Past 
 
 e-oxuX-xsiv 
 
 
 
 Ear. Fut. 
 
 OXSX-£(0 
 
 GXaX-^GOjIKL 
 
 GTsX-io^ai 
 
 Ear. Aor. 
 
 i-gxuX-ov 
 
 S-GTaX-1]V 
 
 i-oxaX-6(j,r t v 
 
 Lat. Aor. 
 
 E-ozeiX-a 
 
 e-GiaX-&rjv 
 
 i-GT£lX-(Xfiip 
 
 Lat. Fut. 
 
 
 OTaX-&iJGO[icti 
 
 
 Perf. Fut. 
 
 
 i-oidX-ooficcL 
 
 
 Examples for practice. 
 A«, cpdetga. 
 
 (paivco, anEtgco, yjdk- 
 
 § 49. INFLEXION OF TENSES. 
 
 1. Each tense may be divided into three 
 parts, viz. tense root, mood- vowel, and termi- 
 nation ; as in txvipas, iivxp is the tense root or 
 that part which is not changed by inflexion in 
 the various modes, a indicates the mood, and 
 o the number and person. tvtzto{iev, tvut tense 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 71 
 
 root, o Ind. mood-voivel, fiev the first person plu- 
 ral termination. 
 
 2. The forms of the tenses, in the first per- 
 son singular of the indicative, being known 
 from the preceding rules, the student has only 
 to vary the vowel for the mood, and the per- 
 sonal terminations, in order to inflect the verb 
 throughout. 
 
 
 § 50. MOOD VOWELS. 
 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plur. 
 
 Pers. 
 
 12 3 12 3 12 3 
 
 Ind. 
 
 OSS OSS S 
 
 Subj. 
 
 co t\ t\ co tj tj co 7i 03. Vowels of the 
 
 Ind. lengthened. 
 Opt. oi. Imp. s. Inf. s. Part. o. 
 
 § 51. TERMINATIONS. 
 
 1. The tenses maybe divided into two class- 
 es ; leading or primary tenses, consisting of the 
 present and future tenses {xvuxco, Tszvcpa, tv- 
 ipco), and the secondary tenses, consisting of 
 the past (stvtitov, szvxpa, hsrvcpsiv). These 
 different classes of tenses have different termi- 
 nations. They are, in general, as follows. 
 
 2. Primary Tenses. 
 
 Active Voice. Passive Voice. 
 
 Sing, [it at, 6 ti, c>i iiai aai tcu 
 
 Dual lisv tov tov lisOov odov aOov 
 
 Plur. \isv ts vjt,vai Lisda ads vtou 
 
72 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 Secondary Tenses. 
 Active Voice. Passive Voice. 
 
 Sing, v a — [jiTjv do to 
 
 Dual [i£V TOV TK\V {.udov cOoV Od^V 
 
 Plur. (lev re dav. v fieOa ode vto 
 
 3. The subjunctive has, both in the active 
 and passive, the terminations of the primary 
 tenses of the indicative, and the optative those 
 of the secondary tenses. 
 
 4. Imperative. 
 
 Active. Passive. 
 
 Sing. Oi to do dda 
 
 Dual tov tcov adov adcov 
 
 Plur. ts Tcoaav dde ddcodav 
 
 5. Infinitive vat. Part. vt. 
 
 § 52. MOOD-VOWELS AND TERMINA- 
 TIONS COMBINED. 
 
 1. Indicative Mood. 
 
 In the active voice the terminations fit and dc 
 (1 and 3 Pers. Sing, primary tenses) fall away, 
 and the mood-vowel of the singular is length- 
 ened from o s e into co £i u. 
 
 Primary Tenses. 
 
 Active. Passive. 
 
 S. CO- £L-S £L- O-fXat £-dOU £-TOLl 
 
 D. 0-fl£V £~TOV £-TOV 0-f.udoV £-dd0V £-ddoV 
 
 P. 0-fX£V £-T£ O-Vdl(oVdl) O-(J,£0a £-d$£ O-VTOLl 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 73 
 
 Secondary Tenses. 
 
 Active. Passive. 
 
 S. o-v e-s e- o-pqv s-ao £-to 
 
 D. o-psv 6-tov £-xr\v o-fisdov s-cdov s-aQqv 
 
 P. o-fiev s-ts o-v o-tisQa e-a6s o-vto. 
 
 2. Subjunctive Mood. 
 In the 2 and 3 Pers. Sing., the mood-vowel 
 sl of the indicative goes into y. 
 
 Active. Passive. 
 
 S. o- zj-s J}- a-pai 7i~aai r\-Tai 
 
 D. o-fxs v r\-Tov y\-iov co-^isdov tj-oOov r\-oQov 
 
 P. (0'iisvri-TB o-vdi(oai) co-pada Tj-aOe co-vtou. 
 
 3. Optative Mood. 
 In the Active retains git for termination in 
 the 1 Pers. Sing. ; in the 3 Pers. Plur. takes ev 
 instead of v. 
 
 Active. Passive. 
 
 S. oi-[xl oi-s oi- oi-^qv oL-ao oi-to 
 
 D. oi-{i£v oi-Tov oi-ti\v ot-fAedov oi-dOov oi-cd-qv 
 
 P. oL-ixsv ol-ts oc-ev oi-[xsda oi-ode ol-vto. 
 
 4. Imperative Mood. 
 
 The active 2 Pers. Sing, drops Oi. 
 
 Active. Passive. 
 
 S. s- s-tco s-ao e-ddco 
 
 D. e-jov b-tov s-adov s-adav 
 
 P. s-ts s-Tcoaav s-ads s-oOcodav (or £c>Qcov). 
 
 5. Infinitive. Active s-vai(s-v), ec-v. Passive 
 
 £-<j6cU. 
 
 6. Participle. Active o-vx (W, \ 26. 2). Pas- 
 sive 0-[JL£VOS. 
 
 6* 
 
74 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 7. The above is a general view of the regu- 
 lar forms. There are, however, some excep- 
 tions in both voices, and the active is less reg- 
 ularly developed than the passive. We pro- 
 ceed to give an example of the above with the 
 exceptions. 
 
 § 53. ACTIVE CONJUGATION. Ulna. 
 
 1. Indicative. 
 Primary Tenses. 
 
 Imp. Pr. lunw } Sing, a sig el 
 Ear. Fut. Xitieco > Dual o/iev exov exov 
 Lat. Fut. Xelipa) ) Plur. o/xev exe ovoi. 
 
 Exc. Perf. Pres. mood-vowel a, 3 Sing. s. 
 Terminations reg. 
 
 Ear. Perf. tiloma f ® n * " " g * 
 
 L, r> c 1 '1 \ Dual c/uev axov axov 
 
 at. Pert. asXelwu Ui / - \ 
 
 T 1 rlur. afiev are avoi^aoi) 
 
 Secondary Tenses. 
 
 t t» * ^ T Siriff. ov sg e 
 
 Imp. Past eXeittov ) t\ \ 
 
 -r, r . „. < Dual OW£V CTOr STVV 
 
 .bar. Aor. tAin-ov J t>i ' 
 
 {. rlur. O^EV «T£ ov 
 
 Exc. 1. Perf. Past mood- vowel si. Termi- 
 nation 3 PI. aav. 
 
 Ear. Perf. Past eXeXoItielv I ^ k' 
 
 t . n c r» i. .I 1 r \ Dual e/wfj' arov f/rwv 
 
 Lat. Perf. Past eXsXeklhv ) p , r ' _ 
 
 ^ ^ rlur. gi^ucv elte Eioav or trjav. 
 
 Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. mood-vowel a, 3 Sing. s. 
 Termination 1 Sing, wanting. 
 
 {Sing, a ag s 
 
 Dual ay.EV axov dxrjv 
 Plur. a^.Ev axE <xv. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 75 
 
 2. Subjunctive. 
 
 Imp. Pr. Xunoa 1 
 
 Ear. Perf. Islolnm Sing, a jjg y 
 
 Lat. Perf. XsXdqxa J>Dual <a{i£v tjxov yxov 
 
 Ear. Aor. Xmw J Plur. copEy rjxe oovoi (woi). 
 
 Lat. Aor. Xstya J 
 
 3. Optative. 
 
 Sing, oifii oig oi 
 Dual oi[aev oixov olxrjv 
 Plur. oipev oixs oitv. 
 
 Imp. Pr. Xslnoifii 
 Ear. Perf. XeXolnoi^i 
 Lat. Perf. XeXelcpoifii 
 Ear. Fut. Xitisoljai 
 Ear. Aor. XUol^iv 
 Lat. Fut. Xslipoifii 
 
 Exc. Lat. Aor. mood-vowel a*. 
 
 C Sing. «i|Ui at? «t 
 Lat. Aor. Xaipai^L < Dual ca^sy atxov a/i?^ 
 ( Plur. ui(i£v aixs aisv. 
 
 4. Imperative. 
 
 £TO) 
 £TOV £T(WJ> 
 
 Imp. Pr. Xslns 1 Q - 
 
 Ear. Perf. Pr. mom? I ^^ 
 
 ■p " a " .J ^ i Plur. £T6 £TW(j«>'(andoVTw>'). 
 Exc. Lat. Aor. mood-vowel a, 2 Sing. ov. 
 
 {Sing, ov ccto} 
 Dual axov axctiv 
 Plur. cjt£ axcaaav. 
 
 5. Infinitive. 
 
 Imp. Pr. Xelneiv 
 Ear. Fut. Xmssiv 
 Ear. Aor. Acts^ 
 Lat. Fut. XslipEiv. 
 
 Exc. 1. Perf. original termination, vai. Ear. 
 Pert. XsXoLTtevcu, Lat. Perf. keksKpivcu. 
 
16 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. mood-vowel a, termina- 
 tion i. ksiipcu. 
 
 6. Participles. 
 
 Imp. Pr. Xunovx~) 
 Ear. Fut. Xmkovt I 
 Ear. Aor. Xmovx j 
 Lat. Fut. Xslipovx j 
 
 Exc. 1. Perf. mood-vowel o, termination r. 
 
 Earlier form XsXomox ) / \ ' 
 
 Later form Xdeicpox j ^ 0Tg ' wg ta ° s ' 
 
 Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. mood-vowel a. Xeixpavx 
 XsiyavTs Xsixpas, cctfa, av, 
 
 § 54. PASSIVE CONJUGATION. 
 
 1. The four middle tenses have regular pas- 
 sive forms, and are therefore included in the 
 passive conjugation. 
 
 2. Both the passive aorists belong to an old 
 form of conjugation without mood-vowels. They 
 will be explained hereafter. 
 
 3. The perfects present and past attach the 
 terminations to the root without mood-vowels. 
 
 § 55. 1. Indicative. 
 
 Primary Tenses 
 
 Imp. Pr. Xelnoficu ' 
 
 Ear. Fut. Pass. Xinijoofxai 
 Lat. Fut. Pass. Xsicp&^aofA 
 
 Sing, ofxai zoai(mi,r}) Bxat 
 
 n c ^ . i i f r Dual oue&ov eo&ov eo&ov 
 
 Peri, r ut. XzXuwouui t». a . „ 
 
 , , r r Plur. ous&a eo&s 
 
 i in S-nnn I. I * 
 
 Ear. Fut. Mid. Xintofiui 
 Lat. Fut. Mid. Xeiipopai 
 
 OVTOCl. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 77 
 
 Exc. Perf. Pr. no mood-vowel. 
 
 Sing. XsXun-^iai (XsXEinfiai) XsXein-ocu (XsXsupai) 
 
 XekEin-Tcci 
 Dual XtXun-iiz&ov (XsXslpiie&ov) XiXun-o&ov (XiXsiy&ov^ 4. 11) 
 
 XsXsm-o&ov (XeXsicp&ov) 
 Plur. XeXun-^s&a {XsXsl^fis&a) XiXsm-a&s (XiXsicp&s) 
 
 XtXunvTUL.* 
 
 Secondary Tenses. 
 
 T „ . ., ( Sing, ouriv wo (so, ov) sto 
 
 Imp. Past • ^W DQa °] f &ov lGd0V ia ^ v 
 
 Ear. Aor. M. shno^v \ piur /^ ^ g 
 
 Exc. 1. Perf. Past no mood-vowel. 
 
 Sing. sXsXsl7i-(xr\v iXsXsin-ao IXeXuti-to 
 
 fi-firjv \po 
 
 Dual iXeXsin-fis&ov eXsXslti-o&ov iXeXsl7i-o&i}V 
 
 p-fis&ov q>-&ov q>-&r)V 
 
 Plur. iXsXsl^s&a eXeXsKp&s (iXsXsinvTo) XsXsifipsvoi yoav. 
 
 Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. M. mood-vowel a. 
 
 CSmg.djj.rjv aoo(ao,(o) ctxo 
 
 Lat. Aor. M. iXsifd^v < Dual d^s&ov no&ov da&rjv 
 
 ( Plur. ape&a ao&s avro. 
 
 2. Subjunctive. 
 
 Imp. Pr. Xu7t(ti[i(XL ) Sing, w/ica yocu (rial, y) r^xai 
 
 Ear. Aor. M. Xlnbi^ai > Dual (a^is&ov rjo&ov rja&ov 
 
 m ) Sing. 
 x } Dual 
 ttt ^ Plur. 
 
 Lat. Aor. M. Xslipw^iciL ) Plur. (a^is&a rja&s lavjcu. 
 
 Exc. Perf. Pr. XsXsif.tfisvog to ?J? jj 
 
 Dual XsXsi^isvia co^isv r\xov r\xov 
 Plur. XeXsifiphoi, w{xsv t)ts (qvoi (doi). 
 
 * An impossible form ; hence XsXuirarcu or \ikuQctrut (§11. 8), and 
 more commonly XiXufipiw iWu 
 
78 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 3. Optative. 
 
 Sing. oi t utjV otao (oto) ono 
 Dual ol t us^ov oio&ov olo&rjv 
 Plur. olfis&a oia&s oivio. 
 
 Imp. Pr. Xstnoif.irjv 
 
 Ear. Fut. P. hmjooifirjv 
 Lat. Fut. P. XsLCp&rjoolfxrjv 
 Perf. Fut. XsXuipol}ii]v 
 Ear. Fut. M. XltteoI^v 
 Ear. Aor. M. Xinolfirjv 
 Lat. Fut. M. XEiyjolfiijv J 
 
 Exc. 1. Perf. Pr. XeXeififxivog si'rjv si'r]g si'r} 
 
 Dual XsXsififiiva sl'rjfisv tVrjTOV HrjTrjv 
 Plur. XeXei^jxevoi sl'rjfisv sI'tjts si'rjoav. 
 
 Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. M. mood-vowel at. 
 
 Lat. Aor. M. Xuxp-ai^iriv mo ano 
 
 Dual alps&ov aia&ov cda&rjV 
 
 Plur. txlfis&a aia&e mvzo. 
 
 4. Imperative. 
 
 Imp. Pr. Xelnsao, so, ov I ^ fV ov . ^n^ 
 
 Lar. Aor. M. kmzao, so, ov D1 «_ r a 
 
 Exc. 1. Perf. Pr. XiXsin-oo(yjo) 
 
 Dual XsXsup&ov 
 Plur. XiXeicp&s 
 
 XeXeItt-o&(o (AeAf/qp-vhu) 
 
 XsXsicp&wv 
 
 XeXsicp&cooav. 
 
 Exc. 2. Lat. Aor. M. mood-vowel a. 
 
 Lat. Aor. M. Xuxp-uu do&w, Dual aa&ov do&iov, Plur. «a^s 
 
 «ff^C0ff«V. 
 
 5. Infinitive. 6. Participle. 
 
 Imp. Pr. 
 Ear. Fut P. 
 Lat. Fut. P. 
 Perf. Fut. 
 Ear Fut. M. 
 Ear. Aor. M. 
 Lat. Fut. M. 
 
 XiiTiEO&ai 
 XtmqoEO&ai 
 Xeicp&rjoEo&ai 
 XeIe'upeo&ul 
 
 XiTlEEU&ai 
 XiTCiadui 
 XfllpEO&CU. 
 
 Xeitto/xevoq 
 
 XinrjooiuEvog 
 
 Xsicp&^oo^Evog 
 
 XEXfiipojiEvog 
 
 XinEoy.EVog 
 
 Xino^Evog 
 
 XEtlfJOfAEVOg. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 79 
 
 Exc. 
 
 Exc. 
 
 Lat. Aor. M. Xdipao&ui 
 Perf. Pr. XsXeln-odai 
 
 Xsupixfisvog 
 XeXsLfi^isvog 
 
 % 56. PERFECTS PRESENT AND PAST. 
 FURTHER EXAMPLES. 
 
 1. Pure verbs attach the terminations easily 
 to the root, and make the 3 PL without the 
 participle. cptXko^ nttpihruiai. 
 
 Sing. 7i8q>lXt][iai 
 Dual 7iecpiXrjiiE&ov 
 Plur. TiscpiXrJiiE&a 
 
 TiECflXriaai nEyiXir\Tai 
 
 7IE(plXr)O&0V 7IECplXl]G&OV 
 TIECplXrjG&S 7lECf>lX7]VTCU. 
 
 Perf. Past snE(piXrj-(i'r)v 
 
 GO TO 
 
 Dual E7lE(plXri-[lE&OV 
 
 Plur. eTiEcpiXrj-fis&a 
 
 adov o&r]v 
 
 G&8 VTO. 
 
 Liquid verbs, acpdkkco, lacpaXtiai. 
 
 Sing. i'ocpaX-fiai 
 Dual iaq)(xX-fiE&ov 
 Plur. EGcpdX-nE&a 
 
 oat TOIL 
 
 o&ov(&ov) o&ov(&ov) 
 
 g&e(<&e) (vtcci) iocpaXfiivoi, slalv. 
 
 Perf. Past iaqxxX-^v 
 
 GO TO, &C. 
 
 Lingual mutes, nsido, ninetd-pou (neTteia- 
 (xat). 
 
 Sing. 7iE7iEL-x>(xm{G(jittL) xhj«t((jca) ■d-Tou(oTou) 
 
 Dual 7lE7lsl-&[AE&0v(0[XE&0v) &G&Ov(o&Ov) ■&G&Ov(o&Ov) 
 Plur. 7lE7l8l-&llE&a(G[ZExya) -d-G&s(a-ds) (&VT(U) 71ETIEIG{IEV0L 
 
 [elgIv. 
 
 Examples for practice, kilsyficu, dedrfhapou, 
 
 7ti(paV-[A.(U, TETQlfi{iai, 7JWT-(iai. 
 
80 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 § 57. SYNOPTICAL VIEW OF 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Imperf. Pres. 
 
 XeItTOJ 
 
 Xilna 
 
 Imperf. Past 
 
 tXunov 
 
 
 Ear. Perf. Pres. 
 
 XiXoma 
 
 XeXoItko 
 
 Ear. Perf. Past 
 
 sXsXoItteiv 
 
 
 Lat. Perf. Pres. 
 
 XeXtiya 
 
 XeXelqxo 
 
 Lat. Perf. Past. 
 
 iXsXdysiv 
 
 
 Ear. Future 
 
 Xineo) 
 
 
 Ear. Aorist 
 
 sXltiov 
 
 Xinto 
 
 Lat. Future 
 
 Xdipoj 
 
 
 Lat. Aorist 
 
 tXzixpa. 
 
 Xslyct) 
 
 Passive 
 
 Imperf. Pres. 
 
 Xdnofiai 
 
 Xun(a^.tti 
 
 Imperf. Past 
 
 sXeinoj^rjv 
 
 
 Perf. Pres. 
 
 XiXsi(.ijnaL 
 
 XsXEifxfiivog (o 
 
 Perf. Past 
 
 iXsXsl^jurjv 
 
 
 Ear. Future 
 
 XiTtrjoofiai 
 
 
 Ear. Aorist 
 
 iXlnt]v 
 
 Xina 
 
 Lat. Future 
 
 X£icp&t]oofiai, 
 
 
 Lat. Aorist 
 
 eXel(p&r)v 
 
 Xstcp&w 
 
 Perf. Future 
 
 XeXslyofiou 
 
 Middle 
 
 Ear. Future 
 
 XlTieOfACU 
 
 
 Ear. Aorist 
 
 eXinofxiiv 
 
 XimafAaL 
 
 Lat. Future 
 
 Xiiyoncti 
 
 
 Lat. Aorist 
 
 eXsuptx f.it]V 
 
 Xeiifjwfxai 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 81 
 
 THE MOODS AND 
 
 TENSES. 
 
 
 Voice. 
 
 
 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 XsItioi^il 
 
 Xsins 
 
 XUTIUV 
 
 Xsinav 
 
 XsXoinoifii 
 
 XsXoltts 
 
 XsXoinivai 
 
 XsXoLTKag 
 
 Xel£lcpoi[u 
 
 XsXeicps 
 
 XsXsicpe'vai 
 
 XsXsiqxag 
 
 Xl7TEOl[U 
 
 XlnoifiL 
 
 XuipOlfXL 
 
 Xelycufii 
 
 Xlns 
 Xetipov 
 
 XiTihuv 
 Xtnslv 
 Xelipeiv 
 Xslifjcti 
 
 Xms'cav 
 
 Xl7t(OV 
 
 Xelipwv 
 Xslipag. 
 
 Voice. 
 
 
 
 
 XsitioI^v 
 
 Xslnov 
 
 XsiTiso&cti 
 
 Xsmofisvog 
 
 XeXeipfisvog nrjv 
 
 XeXsiipo 
 
 XeXsly&cu 
 
 XsXufifiivog 
 
 Xiny\ooliin\v 
 
 Xmelrjv 
 
 XsKp&rjaolfirjV 
 
 XsKf&slfjV 
 
 XeXsiyolfiyv 
 
 XLnr\$i 
 Xslcp&rjTt 
 
 XiTirjoso&ai 
 
 Xmrjvai 
 
 X£iq>&rjO£G&aL 
 
 Xsicp&rjvoiL 
 
 XtXuysa&ai 
 
 Xmrjuo^svog 
 
 Xmug 
 
 XsKp&yoofisvog 
 
 Xsup&slg 
 
 XeXsupofisvog. 
 
 Voice. 
 
 
 
 
 XL7lSOLfir)V 
 Xl7lOl[Xr)V 
 
 XsupoifirjV 
 Xeiip<xl[iT)v 
 
 Xmov 
 Xelipcu 
 
 Xmisa&ai 
 
 Xl7ZS(J&(Xl 
 
 Xslipsad-ai 
 Xsitpaa&ai 
 
 XmsSfisvog 
 Xmofxsvog 
 Xstipofisvog 
 Xsiipafxsvog 
 
82 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 PARADIGM 
 
 Active 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 
 Imp. Pres. 
 
 "kl'ttf-U 
 
 US 
 
 u 
 
 "kuv-u 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 / am leaving, or 
 
 OfllV 
 
 trov 
 
 trov 
 
 Uft.lV 
 
 tirov 
 
 tirov 
 
 I leave. 
 
 oft.iv 
 
 trt 
 
 overt 
 
 UfllV 
 
 fire 
 
 utri 
 
 Imp. Past. 
 
 ikutf-ov 
 
 ts 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 J was leaving. 
 
 o/xiv 
 
 O/uCtV 
 
 trov 
 
 trt 
 
 trtiv 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 Ear. Perf. Pres. 
 
 XikoiT-a 
 
 as 
 
 i 
 
 Xtkoi<r-oj 
 
 V s 
 
 V 
 
 I have left. 
 
 aft.IV 
 
 K.TOV 
 
 arov 
 
 Uft.IV 
 
 vrev 
 
 tirov 
 
 
 afi.it 
 
 an 
 
 aft 
 
 Uft.IV 
 
 tjrt 
 
 Uffl 
 
 So Lat. Perf. Pres. 
 
 \iku<p-a 
 
 as 
 
 t, &c. 
 
 kikuf-u 
 
 V s 
 
 ? ,&C. 
 
 Ear. Perf. Past 
 
 tXtXoivr-uv 
 
 us 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 J had left. 
 
 uft.iv 
 
 UTOV 
 
 urnv 
 
 
 
 
 
 tlfttV 
 
 UTt 
 
 utrav 
 
 or tffav 
 
 
 
 So Lat. Perf. Past 
 
 ikiXu<p-uv 
 
 us 
 
 14, &C. 
 
 
 
 
 Ear. Fut. 
 
 Xivrt-u 
 
 us 
 
 u* 
 
 
 
 
 I shall leave. 
 
 Oft.IV 
 
 eft.iv 
 
 ITOV 
 1<TI 
 
 trov 
 
 oven 
 
 
 
 
 Ear. Aor. 
 
 'UlV-OV 
 
 IS 
 
 t 
 
 XtT-U 
 
 V s 
 
 * 
 
 I left. 
 
 Oft.IV 
 
 trov 
 
 trtiv 
 
 UfllV 
 
 tirov 
 
 nrov 
 
 
 Ofl.IV 
 
 ITl 
 
 ov 
 
 UftlV 
 
 tin 
 
 ucn \ 
 
 Lat. Fut. 
 
 Xii-^-u 
 
 us 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 i" shall leave. 
 
 Oft.IV 
 Oft.IV 
 
 ITOV 
 
 tri 
 
 trov 
 outri 
 
 
 
 
 Lat. Aor. 
 
 'iXu-^-a 
 
 as 
 
 ■ 
 
 Xu\p-u 
 
 tis 
 
 V 
 
 I left. 
 
 UfJt.IV 
 
 arov 
 
 arrtv 
 
 UftlV 
 
 tirov 
 
 nrov 
 
 
 Ct.ft.IV 
 
 an 
 
 av 
 
 UftlV 
 
 tin 
 
 ucn J 
 
 * Commonly contracted in the active and middle ; as \ivru, TUtriTf, X/- 
 Tt?, XiTtTrov, &c. See § 59. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 83 
 
 OF felna. 
 
 Voice. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 \uvr-cif&i 01$ o 
 
 OlfJLlV 
 
 oirov otrnv 
 oin ottv 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 trot 
 
 in irutrav 
 
 iru 
 
 irtuv 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Xuvttv 
 
 Participle. 
 Xiivr-av evo-et ov 
 
 ovros ouffijs ovros 
 
 XiXoif-etftt ei$ oi 
 
 otft.iv oirov o'trv\v 
 otfi.lv otn out 
 
 kt\U<p-Olf£l 01$ Otf&C. 
 
 "KiXoit-i ira 
 irov iruv 
 in irwaav 
 
 xixnip-i iTei/ } 8ce. 
 
 XlXllQlVat 
 
 XiXonr-us via o$ 
 oros via$ oros 
 
 XiXttQ-us via o$ 
 
 oro$ vix$ ores 
 
 Xi<7f(-oift,i 
 
 01$ 01 
 
 
 
 XfTtllV 
 
 Xtiri-av ovfftx. ov 
 
 Olfi.IV 
 
 oirov otrnv 
 
 
 
 
 ovros ovens ovros 
 
 OlfJt.IV 
 
 otri oitv 
 
 
 
 
 
 Xivr-oif&i 
 
 01$ 01 
 
 Xtor-i 
 
 ira 
 
 Xmiiv 
 
 Xm-uv ovffa ov 
 
 otft.iv 
 
 oirov otrv\v 
 
 irov 
 
 iroiv 
 
 
 ovros ouo-tis ovros 
 
 Olft.IV 
 
 otn ottv 
 
 in 
 
 iruffav 
 
 
 
 Xl'f^/-Olfi,l 
 
 01$ 01 
 
 
 
 Xityav 
 
 Xirty-uv ovva ov 
 
 Otfi.IV 
 
 oirov otrnv 
 
 
 
 
 ovros ovens ovros 
 
 Otfi.IV 
 
 otn onv 
 
 
 
 
 
 Xit\f/-atfci eci$ at \Xi7^/-ov area 
 atfi.iv atrov airtjv arov drow 
 
 atft.lv atri anv | an droiffav 
 
 Xit^ai 
 
 XitTp-as uo-a av 
 avro$ arris avro$ 
 
84 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 PARADIGM 
 
 Passive 
 
 Indicative. j Subjunctive. 
 
 Imp. Pres. Iktivr-oftai y trat \kuv-ufzxt *j yrui 
 
 I am (being) left i bpiDov ttrSov ladov apidov naSov tjafov 
 
 (relinquor). bpida tah ovrai\ upiSa. yah uvratl 
 
 Imp. Past 
 I was (being) left 
 (relinquebar). 
 
 ikittf-of&nv cu tro I 
 bpidov iffSov iaSw 
 optDx lah evro. \ 
 
 Perf. Pres. \kiku-fjt,f&cci ifa< ttui Ikikupftivos u> %s y 
 
 I am or have been left', ppiOov <p6ov <p6ov \kikEifz/u.ivu ci>/u.iv yrov %rov 
 
 (relictus sum). (ipiSa. <ph ftfzsvei ^ksku/ifAtvet ufiiv «t£ uai 
 
 [>WI 
 
 Perf. Past llkikii-ftftyv ipo <xro j 
 
 I was or had been left, (*/ju6ov <p6sv <p6nv \ 
 
 (relictus eram). (tpiOa. <ph *ikti-/u,fiivoi 
 
 \r,ffa.v. 
 
 Ear. Fut. 
 / shall be left. 
 
 kiafm-oyat 
 bfziSov 
 
 OfAlSx 
 
 *j zrat 
 
 IffSoV MT0OV 
 
 lafa ovrai 
 
 
 lk'iar-v>v 
 
 VtfllV 
 
 VjTOV 7IT9IV 
 
 nn viaxv 
 
 knr-u 
 
 UfJLlV 
 UfJLlV 
 
 Ear. Aor. 
 I was left. 
 
 Lat. Fut. 
 I shall be left. 
 
 la-ofzcc/ n srat 
 oftttlov tadov ia6ov 
 bfAiQa. lah ovrai, 
 
 Lat. Aor. 
 / was left. 
 
 \ikii<p0-iiv 
 
 ns n \ku<p$-u 
 
 V s 
 
 »/*" 
 
 nrov y)<rviv , ufjt.iv 
 
 nrov 
 
 ti/zsv 
 
 wrt n<rav \ Zytv 
 
 •ATI 
 
 Perf. Fut. 
 / shall have been left. 
 
 ktkii-ip-o/uKt y ira.1 I 
 bpiOov ia&ov ladov 
 by.iPcr. i ah ovrut\ 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 85 
 
 OF Xslnca. 
 
 Voice. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Xei7r-oif*>iv oio 
 oifxiSov 
 oiftefa 
 
 oiro 
 
 fffav oio-Sviv 
 oitrfa oivto 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 "kutf-ov io6u> 
 utQov io-dcov 
 iff fa iff 6 caff at 
 
 Infinitive. 
 \iitfur6ui 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Ximoftivos 
 
 Xi\iififiivo$ ilnv ilns i'i>] 
 XlXiifjcfjtivu ilripiv iinrov s/»jt»v 
 XiXstftf&ivoi ilrif&tv ilnrz u'wrxv 
 
 \i\ii--4>o Q^a 
 tpfav <p6uv 
 <pfa tyduffav 
 
 'hikittySau Ik&kiiftftivos 
 
 
 
 
 XiTyiff-oijunv oio oiro 
 
 oijxifav otffdov oifffav 
 oiftifat oifffa OIVTO 
 
 
 ?-iTVffifffaii IkiTTviffofitvos 
 
 Xiwii-nv 
 
 m 
 
 ■n 
 
 npsv 
 
 f]TOV 
 
 tlTfl 
 
 TlfAtV 
 
 UTi 
 
 yitrct 
 
 \\i<zW'6i tu \\ivr%vut 
 
 \ti(Q6viff-a'ift,nv oio oiro I 
 
 eifcifav oitrfav o'lff&nv 
 
 0l(Jt,l6ot, Olfffa OiVTO I 
 
 Vkiityfa\ffiff6a.i XiKpSyiff'o/Aivos 
 
 \u<pfat-nv fi; '/} 
 
 npiv ?itov nTnv 
 
 VifJI.IV VtTl WffCCV 
 
 Xii<p0i)-Ti toj \\a<p6rivui \hu(pfai$ 
 
 TOV TUV 
 Tt TUffOLV 
 
 XiXti-^-oif^fiv 
 
 oif&ifav oifffav eifffajv 
 
 OlfJltdoi Olfffa OIVTO 
 
 XiXii^/iffdai \kskilt]/OfJt,$VO$ 
 
INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 PARADIGM 
 
 Ear. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Xi-rt-of&cu y 
 
 oftztiov tirdov 
 of/,i6a laCi 
 
 irai 
 
 itr6ov 
 ovrxi 
 
 M 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 IDDLE 
 
 Ear. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 
 to 
 
 MT0OV 
 
 ttrSt 
 
 tfffav 
 
 OVTO 
 
 
 yrcti 
 Wfftfov 
 enroll 
 
 Lat. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Xti-Jz-opai 
 
 V 
 
 iffdov 
 
 ttrh 
 
 tfftSov 
 
 
 
 Lat. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 ufttdov 
 
 CO 
 
 affdov 
 a<rdi 
 
 UVTO 
 
 
 tir at 1 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF THE 
 
 Active. 
 
 
 Indic. 
 
 SUBJ. 
 
 Opt at. 
 
 Imper. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Part. 
 
 Imp. Pres. 
 
 irriXXu 
 
 erriXXtv 
 
 arxXXoifii 
 
 ffriXXi 
 
 errixXuv 
 
 ffr'iXXuv 
 
 Imp. Past 
 
 'itrriXXov 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ear. Perf. Pr. 
 
 'luroXtt. 
 
 itrroXu 
 
 iffroXoifii 
 
 'hroXi 
 
 IffroXivtci 
 
 ierreXuf 
 
 Ear. Perf. Past 
 
 'urroXziv 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Lat. Perf. Pr. 
 
 KTTOcXKOe, 
 
 \<rru.XKu 
 
 iffTCtXK.Olf/,1 
 
 ttrraXxt 
 
 itrraXxivai 
 
 itrrxXxus 
 
 Lat. Perf. Past 
 
 iHTO.Xx.UV 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ear. Fut. 
 
 OTlXiU 
 
 
 (rnXtoiftt 
 
 
 trrtXitiv 
 
 trriXsvv 
 
 Ear. Aor. 
 
 '((TTOCXOV 
 
 trraXu 
 
 ffrcLXoiju.1 
 
 ara.Xi 
 
 a-rttXiTv 
 
 trraXav 
 
 Lat. Aor. 
 
 itrriiXot 
 
 aruku 
 
 ffruXaifAi 
 
 ffriiXov 
 
 ertiXai 
 
 ffTilXas 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 87 
 
 OF Xslnb). 
 
 Voice. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 %.ttfs-oif&yiv oio 
 
 oifjciSov oiffGov 
 o'tfcJa etrh 
 
 oiro 
 oio-dnv 
 
 OlVrO 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 I Infinitive. | Participle. 
 
 YklTtilffSoU \XtTiOfJLiV0S 
 
 XlTT-Oi/XiJV 
 
 oifx,i6ov 
 
 OI(Jl.i6ot 
 
 010 
 
 oitrdov 
 
 oiah 
 
 oiro | "knr-ov 
 eiffUvtv itrSov 
 
 OiVTO \ ifffa 
 
 lo-6a> J \i<rio-6tt.i 
 
 itrdojv 
 
 iff duff av \ 
 
 ki-rofttvos 
 
 Xaip-oifAnv 
 
 otf*.i$ov 
 oifiiSa, 
 
 010 
 
 oiffdov 
 
 oitrfa 
 
 oi<r6nv 
 otvrt j 
 
 \Xttyiffdui 
 
 \Ulf/0fAiV0S 
 
 aifit&ov 
 aifAtSa 
 
 ato 
 
 etiffiov 
 
 aitrh 
 
 u'to-Qnt | atr&ov 
 atvro j ao-fe 
 
 ao-Qoiv 
 affdutruv 
 
 Xltyotffdui 
 
 Xwj/ciftivos 
 
 LIQUID VERB axiUa. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Imp. Pr. I 
 Imp. Past 
 Perf.Pr. j 
 Perf.Past 
 Ear. Fut. 
 Ear. Aor. 
 Lat. Fut. 
 Lat. Aor. 
 Perf. Pr. j 
 
 SUBJ. 
 ffriXXtUfJCOit 
 
 iffraXfA. 
 
 Indic. 
 
 ffriXXofz.ai 
 
 iffrtXXofJLYIV 
 
 effraXfzou 
 
 ffra.Xriaofjt.ai 
 itrraXriv 
 ffTetX6riffofjt,at\ 
 itrraXSinv \ffra\60Z 
 iffra.XffOfjt.at j 
 
 trraXcH 
 
 Optat. 
 
 ffriXXoifjt,nv 
 
 : lffraXftlvo$ t'l- 
 
 [ , ^ 
 
 ffra.Xyiffoifi.riv 
 
 ffrxXuyv 
 
 ffraXhjffotfAnv 
 
 ffruXhiviv 
 
 IffruXffoifitiv 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Imper. j Infin. I Part. 
 trrikXov ffriXXiffSai \ffriX\o[&ivos 
 
 iirraXffo ttrraXSai itrraXftivos 
 
 ffraXwfiff&ui ffrxXfiffo'fAtves 
 ffrdkyj^i ffraXmai ffraXzig 
 
 ffraXSfiffitr&ai ffraXdnffOfiivos 
 sru.X.6nri ffraXdwui \eruXhls 
 
 IffroiXffiffdcii {iffrocXirofAives 
 
 Ear. Fut. I trrtXiofiat j IffrtXtoipnv 
 
 Ear. Aor.' iffru.Xofjt.inv ffraXojpat ffrot.Xolfjt.tiv 
 Lat. Aor. iff ruX a/aw ffniXuf&ai trruXai/xw 
 
 ffraXou 
 ffritkui 
 
 ffriXiiffScti 
 ffrocXiffdat 
 ffruXotffSou 
 
 ffriktofictvos 
 ffrot.Xofjt.ivoi 
 ffriiXdfAtvos 
 
INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 Indic. 
 
 SUBJ. 
 
 Optat. 
 
 Imper. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Part. 
 
 rxinroftxi 
 
 rciffff&fieu 
 
 TXffffOlfAilV 
 
 rdfftrov 
 
 rxffffivtlxi 
 
 TXffffO/XSVOf 
 
 irctffcrofjt.nv 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rirxyfjt.xi 
 
 nrayftivos u> 
 
 
 TtTx\o 
 
 rirx%0eu 
 
 TiTXyfjClVOg 
 
 irtTxyft'/lv 
 
 
 [w 
 
 
 
 
 •rxyto/uxi 
 
 
 ruyzoifjt.yiv 
 
 
 raytiff0cci 
 
 TxyibfAivos 
 
 IraybfAnv 
 
 rxyaifcxt 
 
 rxyoif&nv 
 
 rxyov 
 
 rxyir^xi 
 
 rxyo/ztvos 
 
 rx\»f/.xi 
 
 
 Tet%ttftn» 
 
 
 rx£nr6xt 
 
 <rx%bfiivt>s 
 
 IrafcdfMV 
 
 rx^cafixt 
 
 rce%aiftw 
 
 reckon 
 
 Tx\xff6xi 
 
 rx^x/xives 
 
 § 58. THE MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 The middle voice reflects the action back 
 immediately or remotely on the agent ; as, tv- 
 nxofiai, I strike myself, (pvkdnof.iai, I guard my- 
 self. Along with the tenses peculiar to the 
 middle, the imperfects and perfects present and 
 past of the passive are often used in this sense. 
 The following, then, is a complete scheme of 
 the middle. 
 
 Imp. Pr. { . 
 Imp. Past I 
 Perf. Pr. U 
 Perf. Past i 
 Ear. Fut.l 
 Ear. Aor. 
 Lat. FutJ 
 Lat. Aor. i 
 
 § 59. CONTRACTED TENSES. 
 
 1. The Imperf. Pres. and Past of dissyllabic 
 verbs in ao, eeo, and oco, are contracted in the 
 active and passive voices, and the Ear. Fut. 
 active and middle of mute and liquid verbs. 
 The contractions are mainly subject to the rules 
 laid down in § 8. They are as follows. 
 
 2. In verbs in aco, a before an o sound (ao, 
 aco, aov, and aoi) is contracted into co and (as 
 in aoi) into co ; a before an e sound (as, ar\, asi, 
 
 ■ay) mt0 a an( l ( as m a£t an( l a #) a ' as > T H L( ^ C0 
 TipS, Ti[.idoif.a Tifxwfu, xipas xifia, Tifxdjj Tipa, Tl- 
 fidei Tif.ia. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 89 
 
 3. Verbs in sco contract ss into si, and so into 
 ov ; as, cpiXss cpiXsi, (piXiopsv cpiXovpsv • other- 
 wise, they drop s ; as, cpiXsco cpiXS, cpiXsoi^ii 
 cpiXol[ii, cpiXssiv cpiXsiv. 
 
 4. Verbs in oco contract os and oo into ov ; 
 as dyXosrs hjXovxs, dtjXooixsv dyXovfisv • o before 
 o, oi, ov is lost ; as SrjXoco SjjXco, SyXooi SrjXot, 
 SrjXoov SqXov • before r\ it goes into o, as fo?Ao- 
 ?^Tf drjXcoTS, but before # and si into o* ; as d-qXorf 
 SrjXoi, fajXosi SrjXot* except the Inf. osiv, which 
 makes ovv ; as, BijXosiv StjXovv. 
 
 
 €>- ■&. fe 
 
 
 ev* * * s |a » k 
 
 g B a I I '14 
 
 S £ 5 'I" 5 i-3- ^ s 5 §. g £ S J 
 
 w £ £ „ * v£ ^ 03 » «< "^ ^ ^ Q 
 
 [l* q . -2 fc ^ -^ Ph 5 te §■ §■ g S 
 
 GA . a II* 
 
 & £ PL, Ph Pe, <! JlJftfc^^ft 
 
 J. J- 
 
 8 S 
 
90 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 Imperfect Present and Past of zipac*. 
 
 Indic. Sobj. Optat. Imp. Infin. Part. 
 
 ri/u.-aa/ u da £> doipi afn at a dav av <&av av, 
 
 ir't/t-aov av, 
 
 Tip-dopon ufjictt dufiui aftxi ctoifttiv upviv dou a darStti cLtrdcii aifttvoj apivof - 
 
 ITifA-adftllV upw. 
 
 Imperfect Present and Past of dnXoa. 
 
 onX-ou a ou u eotfii oTfii at ov ouv avv ouv av. 
 
 idr,/.-oov evv, 
 
 itiX-oof&ect avfixt ou/tteti u/ucti oolftyv oiftviv iou ou oi<r6ou ovj&ai oofinog ov pivot. 
 idfiX-oofitiv evpnv. 
 
 \ 61. TENSES WITHOUT MOOD-VOW- 
 ELS (or VERBS IN p). 
 
 1. Some verbs with monosyllabic roots in a, 
 s, o, and others which attach w or wv, form 
 three tenses, viz. the imperfect present and 
 past active and passive, and the earlier aorist 
 active and middle, without mood-vowels ; as, 
 from roots 6e do era, Oifxsv Soiasv (jtcL[isv, in- 
 stead of Oiopsv doofisv (jidofiev, 
 
 2. These tenses incline to the full original 
 terminations; as, Pr. Ind. Act. Sing, pc, a, cn\ 
 2 Sing. Imp. Oi ; 2 Sing. Ind. Pass, acci ; Inf. 
 Act. vou. Their terminations are otherwise gen- 
 erally like those of verbs with mood-vowels. 
 
 3. In the imperfects present and past, active 
 and passive, they prefix to the root the initial 
 consonant with t, except that to roots begin- 
 ning with tit, or, or a vowel, a rough i only is 
 prefixed ; as, do dido, Os Tide, ara laxa, i ie. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 91 
 
 The aorist prefixes the augment regularly to 
 the root ; as 6s, lQr\v. 
 
 % 62. ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 1. Indicative. 
 
 Terminations. 
 Imp. Pr. iii a at D. \jlzv xov tov P. fxsv ts vat. 
 Past v a — fisv rov tt\v fisv re aav,v. 
 
 The radical vowel is lengthened in the sin- 
 gular; as 
 
 rrf-npi W wiri D. tf&tv trev irov P. tptv srt iva-t (rrfuffi). 
 
 \r\6' 1 / / \ 
 
 "a I " v "' " t f Jtiv tT0V STtlv i P lv iTi iffciV \ 0T lv )' 
 
 iff- 3 
 
 2. Subjunctive. 
 
 The Subjunctive has its regular mood-vowel, 
 which it contracts with the radical vowel, o# 
 going into a and cw\ into ?/, not into oi and a. 
 
 <rt6~iu a ins *iS £*J % S. iufifv upt.iv iti-rov nrov tnrov n<rov P. iu/mv ufttv 
 
 [inn nrt iuiri ufi, 
 
 %ih'iu u ens Z$ on u D. oufJt.ivufjt.lv enrov urov onrov urov P. ouft.iv ufj.it 
 
 \Jnr% UTl OUT l U<Tt. 
 
 3. Optative. 
 
 t is added to the radical vowel, as xtdst, and 
 t\ inserted before the terminations of the sec- 
 ondary tenses. 
 
 vih'i-nv ns n D. *if*iv *)tov nrnv P. tiftiv nri n<rav (sv).*' 
 
 htioi-nv *is n *ifttv nrev nrnv nft.iv nri u<retv (iv). 
 
 * More commonly, D, nfatftiv, rrfiirov, rthirnv, P. rtdtTfAiv, rihirs,^ 
 riSuiv. 
 
92 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 4. Imperative. 
 Terminations Oi to, xov tcov, te tgxjolv. 
 
 rih-ri <ru D. rev <ruv P. r$ rutrav. 
 
 o'o-dt ($os) ra> rov ruv <r« raffctv. 
 
 5. Infinitive. 
 Termination vcu; as ridivai, Sidovou, iivat, 
 
 Aor. OeZvai, dovvai, stvau 
 
 6. Participle. 
 Termination vt; as, dtdo-vr (Sidovs ovou oV), 
 tiOs-vt (tlOzls), Sovt (8ovs). 
 
 % 63. FULL PARADIGM. 
 
 1. Tidijui (6a% 
 
 Active. 
 
 Imperfect Present. 
 
 Ind. t<V-*!^/ ns ntrt D. 
 Sub. <rid-u ys »J 
 Opt. <ri6-Uriv lins lit) 
 
 Imp. <ri0-iri tru 
 
 Inf. rittmt Part. mlifr. 
 
 Ind. \rid-nv vis n D. 
 
 Ind. «V-»j» »>- >? D. 
 Sub. 4-£ vis jl 
 
 Opt. ^e/->JV »J >7 
 
 Imp. 0£-$ to; 
 Inf. 6uvou Part &<s. 
 
 Ind. rtd-ifAtxi tffai treti 
 Sub. TtlJ-uy.tt.1 n vjrai 
 
 Opt. <rifal-{A)]v o to 
 
 Imp. r'td-iffo iciu 
 Inf. Tt6ur6a.i Part, r^i^i 
 
 E^EV ET0V £T0V P. E^EV ETS £?(?/ 
 
 &»^<£v tjrov ijrov ufjt.iv tjri utri 
 
 uvifjt.iv tivjrov uvirnv Ufifjctv tinn tivitrecv 
 
 Ufztv urov urrjv u[/.iv un uiv 
 
 ersv iruv trt 
 
 Imperfect Past. 
 
 
 
 
 
 £^4EV 
 
 Aorist 
 
 irriv 
 
 P. 
 
 SjU.IV 
 
 £Tt 
 
 tffUV. 
 
 EjKEV 
 
 trov 
 
 irnv 
 
 P. 
 
 tfjCtV 
 
 trt 
 
 iffuv 
 
 uifjt.lv 
 
 tirov 
 
 yrov 
 
 
 Zfi.iv 
 
 nn 
 
 eotrt 
 
 Hf&ev 
 
 *}T0V 
 
 97TJJV 
 
 
 rifjt.iv 
 
 tin 
 
 vtrav 
 
 70V 
 
 TUV 
 
 
 
 Tl 
 
 rucav 
 
 Passive. 
 
 D. i(jki$ov kt&ov taOov P. ifjt.i6a. uxh ivrai 
 
 u/jt.i6ov tjtrHov ricSov ufziia. ytrfa uvroct 
 
 fiidov eOov aSrtv ftida c6i vto 
 
 itr$ov i<r6uv ttrfa i<r6utra.v 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 93 
 
 Imperfect Past. 
 Ind. \ri6-ifivtv tao tre D. iftthv tffhv ia&w P. ifii6a. teh t\ro. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 Ind. iHi-f&nv ffo <ro D. ftsdov ahv a$m P. (Jti6a ah vro 
 
 Sub. 6-ufjta.i »J ijreti wftshv tjahv %ahv ufjciht, yah uvrctt 
 
 Opt. hUpnv o to pz'Jov a&ov aSvtv fittfu ah vro 
 
 Imp. h-aoiiov) a6u a&ov aOu* ah a&uaav 
 
 Inf. ha6«,i Part. hp.tvo$. 
 
 2. "Iox-qtii (ora). 
 Active. 
 
 Pr. Ind. 'lar-ripi m *iat D. aftzv urov arov P. afiiv an aai 
 Sub. laru Opt. laretitjv Imp. 'laruh Inf. laruvxi Part. <V<ro? 
 Imp. Past Yar-nv va v\ D. ufitv osTav arnv P. a^ev «ts ay or uaav 
 Aor. eW»jy Sub. aru Opt. araitiv Imp. o-t^/ Inf. arnvui Part, arsis*. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Pr. Ind. 'iarafAon Sub. iarZp.a.t Opt. taraifuiv Imp. 'Jarotao Inf. 'Iaraa6a,i 
 Past lard-fitiv ao -to, &c. [Part, larujtivos* 
 
 Aor. Mid. iardf&Tiv Sub. arwpeii Opt. araifAyv Imp. ardao Inf. arda^txi 
 
 [Part, arciftivee,. 
 
 Pr. Ind. 3iSayc< Sub. 3<2£ Opt. $<V«v Imp. )/Wj Inf. M«mi Part. S/SmY 
 Imp. lo/o-ft»v a/j a D. a^Ev aray orjjy P. a^sy ars fla*ay 
 Aor. Ind. i'£«y Sub. £» Opt. Sa/sjv Imp. So's Inf. oovvui Part. W.<. 
 
 Passive and Middle. 
 
 Pr. Ind. titofjMi Sub. h'oufiat Opt. ^a/^jjy Imp. $<Wa Inf. ViloaSut 
 Past l^/5a^»y [Part. ^tooptvos-. 
 
 Aor. M. I^o/i6>jy Sub. ouficti Opt. toipw Imp. SaVa Inf. $«W«i Part. Vo pivot*- 
 
 4. Jeixvvfic (defective). 
 Active. 
 
 Imp. Pr. Ind. hixw-pi Imp. & Inf. von. Part. y«k 
 Imp. Past louxvvv. 
 
94 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Pr. Ind. ^itxvv-fixi Imp. <ro Inf. aSon Part, psvo; 
 Past ibiiKvvfinv- 
 
 § 64. REMARKS. 
 
 1. Several verbs form only the earlier aorist 
 in this way ; as, fiaivco, I go, root /3a, Aor. 
 1/3 rp ' yiyvStixa, root yvo, Aor. syvcov • Svco, 
 sbvv. In these, the long vowels i\, a, and v are 
 retained in all the numbers ; as sfirjoav. 
 
 2. So the two aorists passive are formed, 
 ilirtijv and sXsicpdjjv (tense-roots skins and 
 ilsicpds), and retain the long vowel in the dual 
 and plural. See paradigm of IsiTiofjtai. 
 
 3. The other tenses of these verbs are reg- 
 ular, except that the later aorist of Tidy/ii, iy\\n^ 
 8ida[H 9 has x ; thus, sOrjxa iOyxdfiqv, sdcoxa sdco- 
 xdpyv, -qxa • and from 6s and I (riOrjfu and 
 irjfjii) the Perf. Pr. is rsdsixa and slxa. Aorists 
 in xa are used only in the indicative, and there 
 only in the Sing, and 3 Plur. 
 
 4. Synopsis of fy^u, to send, (root I). 
 
 .Active. 
 
 Imp. Pr. Ind. 
 Imp. Past 
 Ear. Aor. 
 
 ofytt/ Sub. lai 
 
 "nv and 'liov, 'lov 
 
 Opt. him Imp. 
 
 v, (compounds s<p*(j 
 I'/fj* 
 
 \i6t Inf. 
 t/c, utp'tovv) 
 'Is 
 
 livut Part, hfc 
 
 £/v«i u; 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Lat. Aor. 
 Perf. Pr. 
 Perf. Past 
 
 %ko, 
 
 UKO. UKU 
 UKUV. 
 
 
 ritroi/Ai 
 
 UK 01 fit 
 
 
 
 UKIVCU UKU 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 95 
 
 Passive. 
 
 Imp. Pr. 'hfjcui, Imp. Past Yifxrw, Perf. Pr. ufjt.cn Perf. Past t'lftw, Lat. 
 Fut. tdrxrofAcct, Lat. Aor. 'i&nv, Perf. Fut. uffoftxt. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 Ind. Sub. Opt. Imp. Inf. Part. 
 
 Ear. Aor. 'i/u-yiv upxi ilpriv 'itro (ou) 'itrGxi i/usvos 
 
 Fut. riffopai fooiftnv %ffiff$ui fitrofaves 
 
 Lat. Aor. r\x.xf*.v\v. 
 
 § 65. 3 EIMI and r EIML 
 
 Of other small verbs in pi, we shall give only 
 sifu, to be, and si(M, to go, both irregular. 
 
 dpi, to be, (root I.) 
 
 Imp. Pr. 
 Imp. Past 
 Fut. 
 
 Ind. I Sc 
 
 e^k* eTj or sT l<TT< '^ %s 
 
 iiTTov oZfitv nrov nrov 
 
 tfffziv urrov 
 
 Iff/XiV tffr'i 
 
 nfjt.iv v\rov 
 riftiv nn 
 urofAXi etrn 'iffrxi 
 iff-ofzihv ladov ut6ov ' 
 ofAiQu iff fa ovrxi 
 
 ticri(v) oZfj.lv jjVfc ojffi 
 sj or«V 
 
 ntrxv 
 
 Oft. 
 
 Imp. 
 
 li-nv v\$ n \i*fa 'iff rot 
 vifjt.iv v\rav rirm'iffrov 'iffrojv 
 •nfjt.iv yri nffxv'iffri 'itxro/ffxv 
 
 ftifov fffov tr6nv 
 fjt,i0oc ffh v 
 
 Inf. Pres. uvxi, Fut. 'itrurdxi. Part. Pres. av oZffx o'v, Fut. iffoftivog. 
 
 Elfii, I am going, (root L) 
 
 P. "iftiv "rz laffi 
 Part, Iojv lovrx Vsv 
 
 Imp. Pr. iTfci u; or u eJffi D. "ifjt.iv "tov '/rev 
 Sub. "&>, ">js, &c. Opt. 'loifAi Imp. 'I6i, "trot Inf. livxt 
 Imp. Past yuv %u;, &c. and r\'t'x n'ias. 
 
 Mid. to hasten, Imp. Pr. Upon, Past Yifjwv. 
 
 S 66. ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 1. What tenses are actually used in any 
 Greek verb must be learned from observation 
 and from the lexicons. Tenses of the middle 
 form will be often found to supply the place of 
 
96 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 the active. The student should be required 
 to ascertain carefully what tenses are in use, 
 and what are not ; thus, from dxova, to hear, 
 not dxovtia and rjxovxa, as given in the old 
 lexicons, but dxovaofiai and dxrjxoa, while in 
 the aorist jjxovoa is used. 
 
 2. rtyvaaxco, to know, (root yvo, § 44. 1.) 
 Active. Passive. 
 
 yiyvcoaxb) 
 
 yiyvojay.OfiUL 
 
 eylyvuoxov 
 
 tyiyrajoxofiyjv 
 
 yvaaopcu 
 
 yvb)o&rjOO t ucu 
 
 syvtov 
 
 iyvwo&riv 
 
 I'yvwxa 
 
 syv(oo(iai 
 
 eyviaxtiv 
 
 £yvwo{ir t v. 
 
 3. Aa^dvo, to take, (root Xwj3, Acc/3, § 44. 2.) 
 
 Active. Passive. Middle. 
 
 Xa h uftar(o Xa{A(3dvo/u(u 
 
 ilunfiavov iXaufiavojuiiv 
 
 tlafiov (lr\<pfrriv iXa(36[AT}V 
 
 tiltjcpa tikrjfificu 
 
 u).rj(psiv uXi]fxjxriv. 
 
 4. Examples for practice, ^vglaxa, I find, 
 {.lavddvco, I learn, dvrjaxco, I die, £g%o(icu, I come, 
 fidlXa, I throw, nda^co, I suffer, yiyvofiai, I be- 
 come. 
 
 Rem. Many verbs, as yiyvopou, ag/o^iai, have 
 in the imperfects present and past no active 
 forms. Others are altogether passive and mid- 
 dle in form ; as, aladdvo^aL, 8i%0[iai. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 97 
 
 | 67. ANALYSIS AND COMBINATION 
 OF VERBAL FORMS. 
 
 1. To the pupil who has gone thoroughly 
 through the elements of the Greek verb, as 
 hitherto developed, it will now be found a 
 very useful exercise both to analyze and com- 
 bine verbal forms. The student should be 
 rendered perfectly familiar with all the separate 
 parts of the verb, as the nature of the aug- 
 ment and reduplication, their forms and to what 
 tenses they are respectively applied, the mood- 
 vowels, terminations, &c. Then give him, e. g. 
 IXkyovxo to resolve into its elements ; s, the 
 augment belonging to past tenses ; vto, the 
 termination of the 3 Plur. of the secondary 
 tenses, Pass. ; o, mood-vowel of the Ind. ; — 
 thus Xsy is left for the root So XiyoivTo, Xsy 
 root, 01 Opt. mood-vowel, vzo 3 Plur. term, sec- 
 ondary tenses passive, and of the optative which 
 takes these terminations. 
 
 2. Given for analysis. sXsyov, Xet-cuvTo Xi- 
 
 JtyTOV, 7tS7t£l(jTOU, S7l£LGd^OaV 7teL0d}]GOLVTO, TfTOC- 
 
 gayuai, i7tgd%dr]v, Ttga^at^v, jd^avja^ fiXsnov- 
 tcu, pXiyjcovTou, ifiXsipdaOyv, TtscpiXrjVTai, (piXij- 
 oeis, Sca^adoi', iSedicoxTO, dsdiaxafiev, cpvyoljyjv^ 
 (psvyiijai, 7t£<psvyaoi, TtagTiyo^v, (3dXys, /3a- 
 Xoivxo, ifidXXszo, fidXXrjode, sldsvat, xsxirjodai, 
 
 CDXS6TO. 
 
98 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 3. The student should also be in the habit 
 of forming tenses in different numbers, per- 
 sons, moods, and voices, by combining the sep- 
 arate elements ; thus Xsyco, Imp. Past Ind. Pass. 
 3 Sing. ; root \sy, aug. with Past iksy, mood- 
 vowel o, term, vxo ; i-Xey-o-vxo. Lat. Aor. Mid. 
 3 dual Xsy, tense root !Af|, mood-vowel a, ter- 
 mination adijv, i-Xs^-d-adiiv. Opt. 3 PL keg-cu- 
 vto. Practice will make this easy to the stu- 
 dent in Greek, and will give him an unlimited 
 command over the inflexions of the verb. 
 
 § 68. THE TENSES IN THE INDICA- 
 TIVE. 
 
 The import of the tenses has been already 
 given in general in ^ 38, but a few additional 
 remarks are needed to complete the view. 
 
 1. The imperfect present means properly 
 am doing, and, as an absolute, do. From am 
 doing, comes naturally go to doing, am endeav- 
 ouring to do, am accustomed to do ; it is thus 
 employed to state universal propositions. 
 
 2. The imperfect past has all these modifi- 
 cations of meaning except the absolute, (for 
 which there is a distinct tense, the aorist,) / 
 was doing, I went to doing, I endeavoured to do, 
 I used to do. This latter modification of mean- 
 ing is frequent. 
 
 3. The aorist, especially the later aorist, be- 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 99 
 
 side its ordinary and proper meaning of did, is 
 employed sometimes, like the present, to ex- 
 press what customarily takes place ; as, oliyos 
 %q6vos asl btiXvas xds ovvrfdecas tcov (pavXav, a 
 short time always dissolves, &,c. 
 
 4. The perfect present sometimes passes 
 over into an imperfect present, with a new but 
 natural signification ; as, xixTTtfiai, I have ac- 
 quired, hence / possess, vkQvypta, I have died, 
 hence, / am dead. In this case the perfect 
 past becomes an imperfect past, and the per- 
 fect future an imperfect future ; thus, ixsxTtf- 
 fAijv, I possessed, xexT-qao^iai (I shall have ac- 
 quired), I shall possess. 
 
 5. The following scheme presents these va- 
 rious uses of the tenses. 
 
 C I am striking, (I endeavour to strike,) 
 tv7Ttco, < / go to striking, I strike, I am ac- 
 ( customed to strike. 
 
 { I was striking, I went to striking, 
 tov, ^ j us ^ ^ strike. 
 
 hvipa, I struck, I am in the habit of striking* 
 rvxpco, I shall strike. 
 ( zsTvqja, I have struck. 
 \ xixTrtfiou, I have acquired, hence / possess. 
 ( irsTvcpscv, I had struck. 
 ( ixsxT7J[zr}v, I had acquired, I possessed. 
 
 , ( / shall have acquired, hence / 
 
 ' r ' ( shall possess. 
 
 * The aorist is also often used where other languages use a perfect past. 
 
100 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 $ 69, THE TENSES IN THE OTHER 
 MOODS. 
 
 1. The distinction of time, which in the in- 
 dicative is indicated by the tenses, is in the 
 subjunctive and optative expressed chiefly by 
 the moods. The subjunctive follows in its for- 
 mation the primary, i. e. the present and future 
 tenses, and is the conditional mood of these 
 tenses, and is rendered may ; the optative in 
 like manner is the conditional mood of the past 
 tenses, whose analogy it follows, and is ren- 
 dered might. Thus the perfect present is in 
 the subjunctive Tsrvepa, I may have struck, in 
 the optative rsTvcpoifM, I might have struck, i. e. 
 here it is a conditional perfect past. So the 
 aorist indicative or absolute past (hvipa, I 
 struck,) becomes in the subjunctive xvxpco, I 
 may strike, in the optative Tv\pou[.u, I might 
 strike. Even the future becomes in the opta- 
 tive a future in reference to past time ; as, he 
 said that I should shoiv, sXel-s ore S^kcoaotfti. 
 
 2. In the other moods also, viz. the impera- 
 tive, infinitive, and participle, the aorist loses its 
 signification of past time, and differs from the 
 imperfect present only in not indicating con- 
 tinued action. Thus xvxpov, strike, bears the 
 same relation to tvtits, be or go to striking, as 
 hvxpa bears to hvuxov (/ struck, I went to 
 striking). 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 101 
 
 3. We present, then, the following scheme 
 of the force of the tenses in the several moods. 
 
 Indicative. 
 Imperf. Pres. tutctcd, I am striking. 
 Imperf. Past. hv7txov, I was striking. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Tvxpco, I shall strike. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 hvxpa, I struck. 
 
 Perf. Pres. 
 
 TEjvcpa, I have struck. 
 
 Perf. Past. 
 
 hezvcpsiv, I had struck. 
 
 Subjunctive (or Conditional of the Leading 
 
 
 Tenses). 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 TV7tro, I may be striking. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 jvxpcj^ I may strike. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 T£Tv<pa, I may have struck. 
 
 Optative 
 
 (or Conditional of Past Tenses). 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 zvTtToifit, I might be striking. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 Tvipaifxi, I might strike. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 TSTvcpoi^L, I might have struck. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Tvyjoipi, I might strike (hereafter). 
 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 TVTtis , be stiiking, or go to striking. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 rvyjov, strike. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 jhvcps, have struck. 
 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 TvitTSLv, to be striki?ig. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 Tvyai, to strike. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Tsivcpivai, to have struck. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Tvipeiv, to be going to strike. 
 
102 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 Participles. 
 Imperfect. xvtzxcov, (being) striking. 
 Aorist. xvxpas, striking (the mere act). 
 
 Perfect. xsxvcpcos, having struck. 
 
 Future. xvyjav, going to strike. 
 
 4. Let the student give the tenses, with their 
 meanings, of the following verbs in the several 
 moods ; kafxfidva, I take, cpilico, I love, xsXevco, 
 I direct, cpaivo, I show, cpsvyco, I flee, tq£%<o, I 
 run, Xeltzco, I leave, pavOdvco, I learn. 
 
 § 70. EXERCISES ON THE TENSES 
 IN THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. Imperfect Present and Past. 
 2Jo(pia fiovjj dddvaxos fiivsi. c O dvrjg Ovij- 
 oxsi. l H yvvq sQvijoxs. *Ev a iyco ygdcpco dv 
 oidsis. 2v (isv xavxd pot dcdas, iyco 8i ds%0[,iou. 
 Ol 7toXe[iioi fxiv cpsvyovcytv, ijixsts 8i Siaxofisv. 
 Udvxa xd dyadd SiScodiv 6 Osos. IleguTtaxov- 
 [iev iv xco tsgcp xov Kgovov. Bga%sZa ijdovij 
 noXXdxts [iaxgdv xixxst Xvtiijv. Tavza eksysv 
 (used to say) b Ttaxrjg [xov. 2Jcoxgdxns xovg vs- 
 ovg xcov ^Adijvaicov £8i8aox£. e 'Ocfxis (.n] xokd^st 
 xd 7td6n, avxos vn avxcov xoXd^exac. Msyioxov 
 xcov ovxcov, xonos • ndvxa ydg ^cogst' xd^iaxov, 
 vovs ' Sid navxog ydg xg£%si * la/vgoxaxov, dvd- 
 yxij ■ xgaxel ydg ndvxcov • oocpcoxaxov, %govos * 
 dvsvgloxei ydg ndvxa. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 103 
 
 2. Perfect Present and Past. 
 
 Trjv ijtLcfxoXrjv col dnkoxaXxa. Aedcoxds [aol 
 xov %Lxuva. C H kvTtrf 7t£7tXrjg(oxsv vpcov xy\v 
 xagdiav. * AitoXzXoinaOLv yp.ds Btvias xal Ua- 
 Olcov • dXX° ovxs dTtodsdgdxaaiv ovxs ditonscpsv- 
 yaOLv. *Eixl x?]s xoXaxsias, as inl fivrj^iazos, 
 avzo \jlovov xo ovo[ia xrjs (piXlas iitLysyganxaL, 
 JEvql7Tl87]s iv Maxsdovia xsdauxaL. Maya xa- 
 xov pot, dvfxj3sj3r)xsv. Ovdsls tkotzotb dsov sa- 
 gaxsv. TsOvqxs 0iXi7tnos ; Ovx, dXX 3 dodsvsl. 
 c O naxtfg xal 7) (tijxrjg avxov ndXaL ixsxsXsvxTj- 
 xsoav. To nvg ndvxas bfiocas xaisi ' nifvxs 
 ydg xolovxov. ^AnoXaXa vtzo xov divjovs. 
 
 3. Future and Aorist. 
 Tavxa nonjcfco. Tavxa inoLTida. MidQov xd- 
 Xavxov sXafiov xal xovxd 001 dadco. Ot "EXXt\- 
 ves ivixTjdav xovs Ilsgoas. Otjgsvs xt]v *Agid- 
 Svtiv iv Nd^a xoxsXltis xal i^snXsvas. "Oxs xav- 
 xd (the same things) avvs6aLvsv (kept happen- 
 ing) avxS xjj vaxsgaia xal xr} xgixz?, ixdXsas 
 xovs Ttaldas. "Oxe spsXXov ygdcpSLv nagsysvsxo 
 xls. Ovdsls xov ddvaxov scpvysv. *Av7)g aocpos 
 xds iv fiicp dv^Kpogds gaov oi'dSL xSv dXXcov. 
 Ovx sklss (tcivo) xo At\Qt\s vSag ; "Oxl 7) yjv^jj 
 0v7ixrf itixLv ovSinoxs 7tLdxsvoo UoXXd dvOgco- 
 710LS Ttagd yvapiv snsds (fall out, happen). Q H 
 xov Ivd%ov Ttals 7) xaXr) vito xi\s e 'Hgas els 8d- 
 fjiaXLv [isxEfiXjjdr}. 
 
104 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 ^ 71. EXERCISES ON THE TENSES IN 
 THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 
 
 ngoaig/opou i'va, firj Odvrjg. UgooijXOov tW 
 firj Odvois. Asaoixa (xrj rjXidios ysvcopcu. 'Eds- 
 doixsiv [AT} TjXidios ysvoipnv. AnsoxaXxd dot 
 Tavx-nv xrjv S7tiaToXi)v iVa fxddyg jjjv sprjv cpiXtav. 
 ' AnsoTSiXd oo t s7itoioXrjv iW pddois ti]v cpiXiav 
 [iov. 'ExsXsvos fiadtXsvs firf tlvol fidXXsiv nglv 
 Kvgos i[LnXrjodsui fidXXcov. KsXsvst fiaciXsvs, 
 [xjj Tiva fidXXsiv nglv av Kvgos ifxnX^odjj /3ccA- 
 Xov. ' Anisvat ifiovXsro [iiq 6 nanjg xi d%0ono 
 xal rj noXis [A8[i(poiTo. Anisvat fiovXsrcu fljj 6 
 narjjg ti d%ftyrzai xal r/ noXis [iSfupnTac. 'Edv 
 qpiXofiadrjs fa, noXv^adrjg say. Ei (piXopaOijs 
 serfs, noXv[iaOijs av ysvoio. 
 
 Remark, The particles si, ots, instdrf, ngiv, 
 stand unchanged before the indicative and op- 
 tative, but before the subjunctive they become 
 Idv (rjv, civ), oxav, snsiddv, nglv av • as, si i'doi- 
 (ii, if I might see ; sdv loco, if I may see ; si 
 zavd' ovras s%si, if these things are so ; sdv 
 xavd* ovtcos s%ri, if these things be so. 
 
 § 72. FURTHER REMARKS ON THE 
 SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 
 
 1. The original and proper distinction and 
 use of these two moods has been given above 
 and illustrated in the last section. They are 
 both strictly conditional moods ; the optative of 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 105 
 
 the past, the subjunctive of the present and fu- 
 ture tenses. Their use, however, especially 
 that of the optative, is much wider. 
 
 2. The signification of the optative is less 
 near to the actual than that of the subjunctive. 
 It is used, therefore, in cases of pure hypothe- 
 sis, where there is no prospect or thought of a 
 decision. Thus the subjunctive lav tl s%g), Sco- 
 tia, if I have any thing I will give it, implies a 
 design in the speaker to ascertain whether he 
 has any thing or not. It is a case in which he 
 feels interested and wishes to arrive at a decis- 
 ion, while si e%oi{ii tl, dotyv dv, if I should have 
 any thing I would give it, is purely hypothetical. 
 It states the connexion of a given conclusion 
 with a given premise, without intimating wheth- 
 er there is any possibility or expectation of the 
 existence of the condition. The past tenses of 
 the indicative are used where the speaker de- 
 signs to express his conviction that the thing 
 supposed does not and cannot exist. Thus, 
 
 In d. si ti? {i acpsXsi, tt^v %dgiv dnsdldcov civ, 
 if any one would aid me, I would repay the fa- 
 vor, — but I do not expect he will. 
 
 Subj. Idv tls (a cocpeXjj, %aQiv dnodcooa, if any 
 one aids me, I will repay the favor, — -the lan- 
 guage of one solicitous to obtain aid. 
 
 Opt. sl tls [i oo(pshr}(jSis, %dgiv dizodidoinv civ, 
 if any one should aid me, I should repay the 
 9 
 
106 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 favor, — but I am entirely uncertain whether 
 he will or not. 
 
 El ivopiyov xovs Osovs dvOgancov xi cpgovxi- 
 X,siv, ovx dv rjfjiikovv avxcov, if I thought the 
 Gods had any regard for men, I would not neg- 
 lect them, — but I do not believe they have. 
 
 Edv vo^i'Cco Osovs dvOgajrcov xi cpgovxi&iv, 
 ovx dfxehjao avxcov, if I may suppose the Gods 
 to have any regard for men, I will not neglect 
 them, — and I will endeavour to ascertain the 
 fact. 
 
 El vo[ii£oi{ii Osovs dvOgconcov xi (pgovxi^siv, 
 ovx dv dpsXofyv avxcov, if I might suppose, let 
 me but suppose the Gods to have any regard for 
 men, and I would not neglect them, — but it is a 
 point involved in entire uncertainty. Here is 
 a delicate shade of meaning which the English 
 language can hardly express. 
 
 3. Omitting the protasis, — the clause with 
 si, — the optative with dv is used in simple 
 propositions, wherever in English we say might, 
 ivould, can, &c. ; e. g. to a a pax o sides saxiv ov 
 xls dv avjaixo, the corporeal is that which one 
 can touch ; ifiscos dv fidOoipc xavxa nagd gov, 
 I would gladly learn these things from thee. 
 Hence from the tone of moderation peculiar to 
 the Attics, it comes to be employed in making 
 positive assertions ; ovx dv Xd[3ots nagd xov fiij 
 s/ovios, you could not, cannot take from a man 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 107 
 
 who does not possess; tovto ovx dv /svolto, 
 this cannot be. 
 
 4. Exercises. 
 
 Fsvoito av nav iv tco [taxgco XQ° VC P' ^ 0l °^ x 
 dv TCtdoL^iijv Sots (xt) tovto tcolslv. Ovx av 8v- 
 vaio litJ xaficov svBai[iovsZv. ™ Ayis igoTvOsls 
 ncos av tcs iXsvdsgos SiaLiivoi, QavaTOv TtaTa- 
 (pgovSv, scp-q. 3 'Avsv cpiXcov ovdsls av sXolto £j}v, 
 s%cov id louzd dyaOd itdvTa • xal ydg tols 
 tcXovtovgi, xal dg%ds xal Svvaoxsias xsxtthis- 
 vols, doxsc [idfatfTa cptkcov slvai %gsia • iv nsvia 
 ds, xal Tats loutais hv<$Tv%iais, Liovqv otovTai 
 xaTacpvyyjv slvai tovs cpiXovs. MoXis av tis ex 
 Trjs [isyiGTffs iniiisXsias rocs ttJs cpvascos dpagTtas 
 imxgaTrjosisv. Kal iiijv av as kafia tcots (if I 
 ever catch you) • 'Av Xafirfs, a (3sXtiots • tils 8i 
 ovx av Xdfiois. Aixaios av tovs tolovtovs Xs- 
 yoiftsv ( u?/ povov sis savTOvs apagTavsiv dXkd 
 xal Trjs tv%)\s slvai TtgoSoTas. 
 
 § 73. 
 
 The subjunctive and optative are also used 
 to express entreaty, desire, &c, but this in 
 conformity with the principles stated above. 
 The subjunctive chiefly in the 1 PL and the 
 2 Sing, and PL to express direct exhortation, 
 entreaty, command; as, i'copsv, let us go; firj 
 Saviidays, do not wonder. While the optative 
 is more commonly employed like our might, 
 
108 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 may, would, &c. (might it be, may it be,) for 
 more general expressions of desire ; as, oXolo, 
 may you perish. 
 
 Exercises. 
 Mqdsvi dvfxcpogdv ovsidtotjs • xocvi) ydg ij tv- 
 %ij, - xal to [xiXXov dogaxov. Kdv fxovos ys, 
 cpavXov fXTJrs k£§jjs [m\ts igydoy Liijdiv. Kahjv 
 6oi deol didocsv Tvyijv. * SI nal yivoio nazgos 
 evTvyeaxegog. Ttaitav ztavaol ifxd ddxgva tois 
 dots piksOL. @ig* (come on), 6 tsxvov, vvv xal 
 zo Trjs vi\(jov {what pertains to the island, the 
 condition of the island) fiddys. Miq tovto 6 s 
 ddixniia ifiov Oijs, sc xgaTrjaat avvifiij ^ikimtco 
 Tiqv Lidyijv. Eif Ovijaxois oxav aoi to %gs6v eXOtf. 
 EvxXudijs 6 Zaxgazixos, dxovoas tov ddeXcpov 
 XkyovTOs ' dnoXoi^inv si firj os Tiaagi^aaiiurv, iyco 
 di, ei7i£v, st (A,r\ (piXeiv r^ias 7t£Loaif:a. 
 
 § 74. EXERCISES ON THE IMPERA- 
 TIVE, INFINITIVE, AND PARTICIPLE. 
 
 1. Imperative. 
 Toy uiv Osov (pofiov, tovs di yovus zcua ' 
 tovs di cpiXovs aldyvvov, tois di vofiois nsiOov. 
 Aoytaai ngo Igyov. Mi) xaxots olilXsi. Tds 
 rjdovds Oijgsvs zds LUTa dofys • Ttgvjis ydg, avv 
 tS xaXS [isv, dgiOTOv, dvsv di tovzov, xdxiOTOv. 
 c Hyov tidXiOTa osavTco nginuv, xociiiov, aio%v- 
 vijv, acofpgodvvvv. J ' yiys dr), cb KgiTcov, 71£lQ(oii£- 
 Oa avTo), xal ivsyxaTco tls to (pdgiiaxov si TSTgi- 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 109 
 
 nrai • s I Si fir), TQiyjdrco 6 avQgaitos. El tls 
 hi tlvos ivdstadaL Soxsl, 7igog ifis Xsyiia, xal ft 
 
 TLS SLTtSLV TL ftovlSTCLL, Xb^OLTCO. Mtf [AOL aVTlki- 
 
 §#s. *AXkd zai/Ta ovtcos nzitgdyQa. El vlos 
 si tov Oeov, aaaov asavjov, xal xaTafi-ndL and 
 tov aravgov. El fiadLXsvs 'IogarfX Itfrt, %tma- 
 fiyJTco vvv and tov OTavgov. BgaSeas [xiv cpiXos 
 ylvov, ysvofisvos Si neiga 8l<x[.isvslv. Ail%ov tl iv 
 tz} nrjga %%us* 
 
 2. Infinitive. 
 XaXsndv to 7toL£Lv, to Si xsksvctaL gaScov. To 
 xaXas dnodavelv lSlov tols dyadols. Ovtol ov- 
 tcos fjdv sctlv to xgtfpaia £%slv as dvLagov to 
 dnofidXXsLv. Ov to %aig£Lv Igtlv sv ngaTTSLv, 
 ovSi to dvidodai, xaxas. Xgrf (3gaSias fiiv cpl- 
 Xov ylveodaL, ysvofisvov Si duxfjiivsLv. KeXeva 
 as (pvkd^aL tijv yvvalxa, xal SiacpvXdTTSLv e'as 
 dv wutos SsI-copaL. Mbl^ov (iiv xaxov cpaiisv to 
 dSLxsZv, IXaTTov Si to dSLxeZadaL. "0 ilbXXsls 
 ngdiTSLv [xij ngoksys ' dnoTv%av ydg ysXaad-qarf. 
 Kddfiov cpaalv ix <Polvlxtjs vnd tov fiactLXsas 
 dnoOTaXijvaL ngds &JTnoLv Evganvs. Eig!-7]s, 
 as invdeTO tov 'EXXrjonovTov i£sv%dou, xal tov 
 "Ada SiectxdcpOaL, ngorjyev ix Tav JJdgSsav. 
 
 Remark. The neuter article is used in all 
 its cases with an infinitive, converting it into a 
 noun ; as, xaigds tov Xiysiv, the season of speak- 
 ing ; Ix zov vopL&Lv, in consequence of thinking ; 
 iv tw TtsLgdoOaL, in the endeavour. 
 9* 
 
110 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 3. Participle. 
 
 XaXsnov sotl Xkyuv ngos yadiiga, coxa ovx 
 s/ovoav. 'Adtxst JZcoxgdwis, ovs i) no fag volu&l 
 Osovs, ov vo^ii'Ccov. c HgaxXrjs ogyiodsis Alvov 
 drtixTSivs. e O 2Jaxga,T7fs cpagpaxov mcov dnk- 
 davev (died of drinking), dioyivns Xv%vov psd* 
 fftisgav (by day) dyjas, dvdgconov, %cpn, "Cvtco. 
 C Q nals i^eXQcov xal 6v%vov %govov diaTgtipas, 
 fjxsv dycov tov iikXXovTa Saosiv to cpdgpaxov, iv 
 xvXixi (psgovza TBTgifiLiivov. Zcov 6 cpavXos xal 
 Oavoov xoXd&Tac. 
 
 Remark 1. The participle with the article is 
 used where in Latin and English the relative 
 and verb are employed ; as, 6 kolcov, he who 
 does (qui facit) ; 6 Tgtycov, he that runs ; 6 [3ov- 
 Xollevos, he that chooses ; b xaTnyogcov, he that 
 accuses, the accuser ; r) anoXoyia tov opevyovTos, 
 the plea of the defendant. 
 
 Exercises. 
 Ov% o £%k> v TtXudTa £v8aL(jLOviataT6s ioziv, 
 dXX' 6 <jO(pG)TaTOS (ov. c TtdvTa dtoix&v xal 
 (JtaTaTTcov dsos idTi. Uavzl tS ahovvn doQi\ae- 
 tcll. C H dXijdsta tovs elSot as [iiya Gxpsfajasi. 
 Tov fxiv sv [it nzTtoivxoTa, cpiXov slvai rj/ovpai, 
 Toy 8i TzgoSaoovTa i%Qgov. c O xgijcfi^ sldas, 
 ov% 6 rcoXX eldcos oocpos. c O cpdovcov, iavTOv cos 
 tyOgov Xvtzu. O tcov Usgacov fiadiXsvs, 6 tov 
 ' ylOco dtogvl-asi 6 tov ' EXXy\guovtov £ff'|as, 6 yijv 
 xai vdcog tovs a EXXirv as acTcov, b ToXfiSv iv Tats 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. Ill 
 
 irtidToXais ygdcp£iv on dscf7i6iij9 icfrlv dndvTcov 
 dvQgcontov dq>' r)Xtov dviovTos {i£XQ L 8vo[iivov, 
 vvv ov Ttegl tov xvgcos hegcov elvac Siaycdvi££- 
 tcu, dkV rjdtj nsgi irjs tov acofxaios ocoTrfgias. 
 
 Remark 2. Many verbs, as those signifying 
 to know, to see, to show, to appear, to remember 
 and forget, to begin and end, take after them a 
 participle instead of an infinitive ; as, olBa av- 
 tov aocpov ovtol, I know him to be wise (scio eum 
 sapientem esse). 
 
 Exercises. 
 tplkvKTth, (ASfivTjtio dvOgconos civ, Otda Ovq-ios 
 cov. IlavcioujQs dSixovvrss. Ovs dv ogco (whom- 
 soever I may see) zd xaXd iTtiTTjSsvovT as, tov- 
 tovs Tif.ir\6G}. 3 AvdgcoTtos cov, fii^vyao T7\v xotvrjv 
 tv/tiv ooi ovaav. <Pavsgds iaziv rjdixrjfiivos vtz* 
 eiiov. Oi vofxot qpaivovTai fiXdmovTes r/fxdg. 
 c Ogco Trjv Tv%tjv tjialv avXXa^dvovoav xal tov 
 ndgovTa xaigov awaycovt^o^vov. At §7ti0v[iicu 
 0V710TS Xr\yov6iv atxi%6[i£vou tocs yjv%ds tcov dv- 
 Qgconcov sot 3 dv dg%coGiv avzcov. <Pavegos yv 6 
 Kvgos, si tls tl dyadov 7} xaxov jzoujostsv uvtov, 
 
 VlXCiV 7t£ig6[A£VOS. 
 
 Tgvlkos, 6 &£vocpcovios vtos, iv Tjj pd%r) it£gi 
 MavTiv£iav tti/vgdos dycovi<jd[i£vos £T£X£vtt]G£v. 
 °Ev TOLVTjf Tjj H<d%Ti xal ? Ena^ivavdas £7t£6£v. 
 *Aitayy£ XOivros 8i &£vocpcovTi tov OavaTov tov 
 nouSos, ovx iSdxgv6£, dXld ydg, £cpr}, jjd£tv dvq- 
 tov y£/£vvrix6s. 
 
112 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 ^ 75. MIDDLE VOICE. (See § 54.) 
 
 1. The middle voice has a reflexive signifi- 
 cation, and denotes, 1. an action terminating in 
 or upon the agent ; as, cpoj3sco, I terrify. (po/3ov- 
 [acu, I fear, Xovco, I wash, Xovofxai, I wash my- 
 self cpvXdzzco, I guard, cpvXdzzopai, I guard 
 myself, I beware of (with an Ace.) ; 2. an ac- 
 tion performed for the agent, or with reference 
 to him ; as, xazsozgsyjazo toV M-qdov, he sub- 
 dued to himself the Mede. 
 
 2. It is sometimes causative ; as, kva, I loose, 
 I release, Xvoficu, I cause to be released, I ran- 
 som. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 <&vkdzzcd tov Xsovza, <&vXdzzoLLai Xsovza 
 sntcpsgo^svov. ' EXovds to sllov ocoLia xal dnsX- 
 dcov slovdazo. Xgij nsidsiv zovg cpilovs xal jisl- 
 dsodat zolg voices. <P6fisi zovg xaxovg xal cpo- 
 ftov zovg Osovg. ' Ejzsidi] Oscl acozrjgsg xviidzav 
 ELii s^stkovzo, in igyaciav zgsvjoLLai. " Edv lis 
 ol dsol ex xivdvvov dnaXXd^coat, duo zavzijg zrjg 
 yfjs arcaXXd^oiiat. /tiaXvoixivov dvOganov, ij 
 vjvyr\ ovzs nagovda ovzs diziovca ogdzai. f H 
 Ildvdsta, dxLvdxijv nakai nagsaxsvaoLLSvij oepdr- 
 Z8L eavzijv ' ol 8s svvov%oi, Idovzss zo ysysvrjLLS- 
 vov, anaoaLisvoL xdxslvoi zovg dxtvdxag, dno- 
 Ofdzzovzai. Kvgog si'sduoazo zd bnXa d 6 
 jidizuog avzco s^sjiskolt^zo. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 113 
 
 § 76. EXERCISES ON VERBS IN p. 
 
 Je%o[,icu rjSias oaa pot didcos. Tds [xexafioXds 
 xrjs xv%ys ysvvaicos initixaoo (pigecv. Ovdiv avsv 
 Ttovov Beds St8(D(jLv dvdganoLs. Xgovos Sixaiov 
 dvSga 8eixvvai [xovos. 'Agsxrj, xdv ddvq xis, 
 ovx dno'k'kvxai. Geos ndvxa xiQy\oiv om\ OiXsL. 
 Avxovgyov, xov Osvxa ylax£dou i uovLOis vofiovs, 
 docpSxaxov slvai i]yov[xou. e O vo^tos ksyec o 
 [irj xaxidov fjirj hapfiavs. Mkya xaxov xo fxrj 
 dvvaodai cpiguv xaxov. <Paol xovs <Polvixas 
 ovx If dg%ijg svguv xd ygdfipaxa, dXXd xovs xv- 
 itovs [iqvov [.uxaduvai. KaxoXoylas dcpioxaao, 
 STtaivsi paXXov ndvxas dvOgcoitovs. Tovxov xov 
 vdfiov 6 deos xiOetxsv • et xi dyadov dieses, nagd 
 6£aviov lafii. Mrj dit-aoQs xr^v vijoov, ei 8i8co- 
 aiv, dXXd (itf d7todt3ioai. 
 
 § 77. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ON 
 THE VERBS. 
 
 zfjjfioodevovs SLTtovxog 1 ngos xov (Paxiava, 
 dnoxxsvovoi as ^Adyjvatoi Idv [xavaoi, vat, bitcsv, 
 ipi [isv, idv [xavcooi, as 8i, idv aacpgovcoai. Tds 
 piv xav (pavXcov avvijOsias oXiyos %govos SiiXv- 
 cfs 2 ' xds Si xdov anovSaicov cpikias ov8° dv 6 nds 
 aicov s<-aXsivjsisv. IlgsTtsi xovs dot-Tjs bgsyofxs- 
 vovs s xav cutovSaicov dXXd firj xav (pavXcov sivai 
 [Mfiijxds. c P6)^7i [isxd fxsv (pgovtfascos GHpiXrjasv, 
 dvsv di xwvxy\s nXsico xovs s/ovxas sfiXavjs • 
 xal xd [isv ocofxaxa xeov daxovvxcov ixoaprias xais 
 
114 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 8s T^js vjvyjjs inipsXsiais in saxoTijo sv. C H zijg 
 dgsTijs xzrjois nXovTov xgsiTTcov, ^g^OL^KOTsga sv- 
 
 ySVSLaS SOIL. 
 
 1 Demosthenes saying, Gen. Absolute. — 2 diskvoe, dis- 
 solves. So below (ocpsliioEv, aids, splays, injures. — 3 tovq 
 .... OQE/ofisvovg, those aspiring, or striving after glory. 
 
 Mi\8snoTS fxj^dsv aia/gov noirjoas sXmU Xij- 
 dsiv 1, xal ydg av 2 tovs dXXovs XdOys, osavTco 
 ys 3 gvvsi8ijgsls. 
 
 Mij8sva qpiXov noiov nglv av s^STaays nas 
 xiXQifTai tois Ttgojsgov cpiXois. *' EXniC,s ydg av~ 
 tov xal nsgl os ysvijasaOac toiovtov olos xal nsgl 
 ixsivovs ysyovsv. 
 
 2?Tsgys fxsv id nagovTa, &jtsi 8s rd fisXzict). 
 Nofxi^s [Mfdiv slvai tcov avdgonivcov fisfiatov • 
 ovtco ydg, ovz\ svtv%cqv, say nsgi%agiqs, ovts 
 8v<jtv%cov, nsgiXvnos. 
 
 1 Hope that you will escape notice. — 2 av same as idv, if. 
 — 3 owvioi ye, with yourself certainly, at least. 
 
 Tovs cpiXovs svegysrovvTes xal 1 tovs i/Ogovs 
 SwijasaOs xoXdX,siv. z/ioysvrjs sXsysv 2 oil 01 
 fxiv dXXot xvvss tovs i%0govs 8dxvovaiv, syco 8s 
 tovs (piXovs, iVa ctGoGG). ^4i8ovs nagd ndaiv 3 
 d^ios soy idv ngazov ciggys oavTov ai8stodai. 
 KgsiTTOv els xogaxas i\ sis xoXaxas ipnsosiv 4, 
 ol fjtiv ydg vsxgovs, oi 8s &)i/tgcs iaQiovdiv. 
 c HyovfjtsOa tov OdvaTov slvai ti)v Trjs vjv%rjs 
 and tov oapaTos dnaXXayyv. UoXsf.iovs xal 
 dTaasLs xal [idyas ov8sv dXXo nags%si ij to cfcofia 
 xal at tovtov snidvpiai * 8id ydg ti\v tcov X9V' 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 115 
 
 [idrcdv xxrJGLv ndvTes ot n6Xe[ioi r^iiv yiyvovjai. 
 1 H uiv ipv%)j eoix£ tS dsicp, to 8i dapa ta 6vij- 
 
 T(D. 
 
 1 nod, also. — 2 lltysv, used to say. — 3 nagoc naaiv, in the 
 estimation of all. — 4 efcnlmw. 
 
 % 78. ENGLISH INTO GREEK. 
 
 1. Active. 
 
 / am writing. I was writing. I have written 
 a letter. Thou hast written to me a letter. 1 
 will write to you. I was writing when you came 
 (sg/ofjiai). / was coming when you wrote. I 
 was writing when you were coming. I had writ- 
 ten when he came. Go to writing. Do not write. 
 Let him write to me a letter. Do not keep writ- 
 ing. If he should write, I should not come (si 
 ygdipat ovx dv sX0oi[ii). 
 
 2. Passive. 
 
 The letter is written (has been). The letter is 
 (being) written (scribitur). The letter shall have 
 been written. If he comes (idv ehdj}) it shall 
 not be written. If these things are written. If 
 these things should be written. Let the letter be 
 written. Let my words be written. Thy law is 
 written in my heart. The letter had been written 
 when he came. The law was written (eygdcpdif) 
 on stone. 
 
 3. The soul of man is not seen. 1 (Edipus 
 slew 12 his father Laius, discovered 3 the enigma 
 
116 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 of the Sphinx, and married 4 his mother, Iocaste. 
 Learn and then teach. 5 God sees the hearts of 
 men and knows 6 their sentiments.' 1 Plato taught 
 (used to teach) in the Academy. What shall I 
 do? God sent* his son into the world. All 
 the wicked are punished* in Hades, both kings 
 and servants, rich and poor. The Hellespont 
 was called 10 from Helle dying in it. He that 
 knows these things will do them. To do the will 
 of God brings u happiness. 
 
 1 oqu.(x). — 2 Aor. ocntxTsivs. — 3 £%£VQL(jx£iv. — 4 ya^iiio. — 
 5 diduay.oi. — 6 yiyiwoy.w. — ~ didroia. — 8 nsfinw. — 9 y.oXd- 
 £<y. — 10 xaXew. — n cpigca. 
 
 § 79. PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 These govern three cases, the Genitive, Da- 
 tive, and Accusative. 
 
 Gen. dvxi, duo, ex, ttqo. 
 
 Dat. Iv, avv. 
 
 Ace. eis, dvd (dvd, in the poets, governs also 
 the dative). 
 
 Gen. and Ace. did, xaid, vjieg. 
 
 Gen., Dat., and Ace. d[Mpi, ini, (.isrd, nagd^ 
 
 7TSQI, 71QOS, V7t6. 
 
 The fundamental idea of the genitive is that 
 of going forth, proceeding out of or from ; that 
 of the dative (the case of the remote object), 
 approach, nearness. The accusative denotes the 
 immediate object of the transitive verb; hence 
 the idea of motion toward, reaching foricard, 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 117 
 
 and attaining. The meaning of the preposi- 
 tions is often modified to correspond with these 
 several ideas ; thus, 
 
 With Gen. ix, out of, dno, from ; Dat. iv, in, 
 dvv, with; Ace. els, into. 
 
 nagd, along side of G. from the side of D. by 
 the side of A. to or toward the side of; hence, 
 G. from, D. with, at, A. to, toward. 
 
 ngos, to, G. from to (ab), on the part of, D. 
 close to, A. to, against. 
 
 1. Prepositions governing the Genitive. 
 
 *Avti, over against, against; hence, in ex- 
 change, one thing against, instead of, another, 
 instead of, for (its usual meaning) ; Sovhos dv- 
 zi fiaailias ' dvd 3 &v, for which things. 
 
 '' ' Ano, from ; as, and rrjs nokecog, an ixeivov 
 tov xqovov ' hence, arising from, springing 
 from, by reason of; 6 and noXspicov cpofios, the 
 fear arising from the enemy; and dtxaioavvip, 
 from, by reason of, his justice. 
 
 3 Ex, out of; ex Trjg nokem ■ hence, one thing 
 out of another in point of time, after ; as an 
 effect, in consequence of, from, by, ex noleiiov 
 xaxd ■ ex tovtov, after this, or in consequence 
 of this ; ex cpiXcov neiodelaa, persuaded by her 
 friends. 
 
 Ugo, before; ngd t??s nolecos, ngd tov noXepov, 
 noXepov ngo eig-qvns, war before (in preference 
 10 
 
118 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 to) peace; before, by way of protection and 
 defence, for, on behalf of pd/sodou ttqo najgi- 
 8os. 
 
 2. Prepositions governing the Dative. 
 3 Ev, in ; iv Tjj noXw iv ravzy rrj fjpsga, in or 
 on this day ; hence, iv ooi iap,ev, ice are in thee, 
 i. e. altogether dependent upon thee ; hence, as 
 that on which the doing of something depends, 
 through or by ; iv vo^odhais OsoOcu vo^iov, to 
 enact a law by means of JYomotheta ; iv Xaols, 
 in, i. e. among the people. 
 
 JZvv, together with; ?JA0£ tivv Msvzlaco, he 
 came with Menelaus ; hence, on the side of, cvv 
 "EXhjGiv etvai, and with the aid of, ivixnae avv 
 *A0nva, he conquered in connexion with, i. e. 
 with the aid of Minerva. 
 
 3. Prepositions governing the Accusative. 
 
 Els, into ; elaijXdov els ti)v tcoXlv • to ; as, 
 ixsio sis Kqsovtol, he came to Creon. I do 
 this into a thing, i. e. for a thing, with respect to 
 a thing ; hence variously rendered, according 
 to the connexion, for, on account of, with respect 
 to, toward, against, before ; as, inatvelv tlvol els 
 tl, to praise any one for any thing ; us Ttva si- 
 tcelv, to speak to, or before any one ; els to Isq6i> 
 ijoepow, they committed impiety in respect to, or 
 toward the temple. 
 
 Avu, up, along up ; dvd xov noja^ov nXisiv, 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 119 
 
 to sail up the river. This meaning is rare ; gen- 
 erally, throughout, along over ; dvd ti\v *A<siay, 
 along over, throughout Asia ; dvd otooctoV, 
 throughout the army ; dvd ndvxa xd sin, along, 
 during all years ; dvd xgdros, up to o?ie's power. 
 
 *Avd, with the poets, governs the Dative, and 
 signifies upon; xgvasa dvd ax-q7tjgco. 
 
 4. Prepositions governing the Genitive 
 and Accusative. 
 
 did, through. Gen. to £y%os fjhde did tov 66- 
 gaxos ' hence (as that which we go through is 
 the means of arriving at a given object), by 
 means of; thus, did itoXk^ov yiyvsxai Okiyjig, 
 through, by means of war comes affliction ; dis- 
 Ai/fro aviois 6V igpwvsas, he conversed with 
 them through an interpreter. 
 
 Ace. through (poetic) ; Sid dco^aia, through 
 the mansion. On account of; did ravra, on ac- 
 count of these things, viz. either retrospectively, 
 in consequence of these things, or prospectively, 
 for the sake of these things. 
 
 KoLxd, down. Gen. down from ; xard tSv 
 rtsigav giuxeiv xivd, to cast any one down from 
 the rocks; hence, under; xaxd x6v xv^idxcov, 
 down in respect to, i. e. under the ivaves ; xaxd 
 axonov, down in relation to a mark, — at or against 
 a mark; thus against, its ordinary meaning with 
 Attic writers, chiefly of language, thoughts, 
 &c. ; s iTtsiv xaxd xivog, to speak against any one. 
 
120 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 Sometimes more general, in relation to; thus, 
 ot Inaivoi xaxd rrjs Ttoksas, the praises lavished 
 on the state. 
 
 Ace. as relates to, according to, the general 
 relations to be modified by the connexion ; 
 xad° a O{i7]Qov, according to Homer ; xard yrpr 
 xal xard 6d).aoaav, in respect to, i. e. by land 
 and sea ; ol xax *Aoiav bvrss, those who are 
 in Asia ; [isi&v laxly i\ xaxd dvdgconov, he is 
 greater than according to man, — greater than 
 human ; xard nokeis, according to cities, — city 
 by city ; dicupsgsi xaid to peysdos, he surpasses 
 (as to, as it respects) in stature. 
 
 'Ytzzq, over, above. Gen. above with verbs of 
 rest ; to vdag vtcsq tcov {.laGxcov icpaivBzo, the 
 water appeared above their breasts ; l| AiQioni- 
 ag t^s vTzig AiyviiTov, from JEthiopia ichich is 
 beyond Egypt ; hence, over by way of defence 
 and protection, on behalf of, for ; vttsq tcov c EX- 
 hjvoov [.idxstidai, to fight for the Greeks; hence, 
 in relation to ; si xd nagd dot xaXcos e%£i, Odg- 
 gst vneg Ixuvcov, if thy affairs are prosperous, 
 be of good courage in relation to them. 
 
 Ace. over, with verbs of motion ; fidXleiv 
 vntg tijv oixiav, to cast it over the house ; above, 
 beyond, with verbs of rest ; vnig Xoyov, above 
 description ; KXiag/og iTtoXe^sc tols Ogai-l rots 
 vneg c E\h\cinovTOv oixovai. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 121 
 
 5. Prepositions governing the Genitive, 
 Dative, and Accusative. 
 
 *A[.i(pi, about. Gen. and Dat. about, concern- 
 ing, on account of; d^Kpl ttjs noXscog • dficpl to 
 (jiofxan ' dpq)' 'Elevq fxd%£60cu, to fight on ac- 
 count of Helen ; Toijjd' d^icpl yvvcuxl noXvv 
 %qovov dXysa nda^etv. 
 
 Ace. about, in the vicinity of; d^icpl zd og-q 
 iysvero, he was about, i. e. in the neighbourhood 
 of the mountains; d^yi ti s%eiv, to be occupied 
 about any thing. 
 
 *Em, upon. Gen. inl noXsco? jSco^Sv, upon the 
 altars of the city ; hence, at, by ; inl ttJs OaXda- 
 6n?, u P on > a t M %e sea i %*' r)fiSv, upon us, i. e. in 
 our time. 
 
 Dat. close upon, by ; inl tS nora^a, close by, 
 by the river ; hence, dependent upon ; ovx sazou 
 inl tco ddsXcpS, he will not be dependent on his 
 brother ; inl dagoes, dependent upon gifts, on 
 condition of gifts ; inl tovtois, on these condi- 
 tions. 
 
 Ace. upon, with verbs of motion ; dvsnidrjosv 
 inl toV innov, he leaped upon the horse; to, 
 against ; rjXavvsv inl to nddos, he rode to the 
 fatal spot ; iivai inl tovs noXepwvs, to go against 
 the enemy. 
 
 MsTa (psoos, middle,) implies connexion, 
 community, being in the midst of a thing; hence, 
 Gen. with, among, in connexion with; ^sra 
 10* 
 
122 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 vsy.gav y.uadai, to lie among the dead; (.uja <jv{i- 
 
 [id%&v fld%£6dai. 
 
 Dat. (Poet.) among ; ^urd ozgaTcd, fierd %sg- 
 ctiv, in the midst of, i. e. in his hands. 
 
 Ace. In Homer, among, with verbs of motion 
 and also of rest ; sfin ngos ovgavov pierd daipo- 
 vas dXXovs. With Attic writers, next, next af- 
 ter, after ; 2Jdg3eis, nofas nXovoiaTazi] pszd Ba- 
 fivXcova, Sardis, the richest city next to Babylon; 
 [aid zavza, after these things. 
 
 Uagd, by the side of Gen. from the side of, 
 from (with reference to source, dno with refer- 
 ence to distance) ; dyyeXos nagd fiaGiXecos, a 
 messenger from the king ; padslv nagd twos, to 
 lectm from any one ; hence, by ; nagd zcov dscov, 
 from or by the Gods. 
 
 Dat. with (apud), by one^s side, among; nagd 
 (joi xazeXvov, they lodged with thee, — (chez 
 vous) at thy house ; nag' i^uv zavza ovzeos iazi, 
 with us (where we live) these things are thus ; 
 dgzzi) ziudzai, nagd deoig xal nag' dvdgconots • 
 hence, in estimation of; nag' i(xoi, with me, i. e. 
 in my estimation. 
 
 Ace. to, towards (to the side of), along (along 
 side of), nagd zi)v noXiv, to the city ; nagd toV 
 noza { uov, along the river ; near (by the side of), 
 xgijvq nagd zrjv odov, a fountain near the road ; 
 denotes comparison (one thing along side of 
 another), in comparison with ; zavzd iazi nag' 
 ovoh, these things are in comparison with noth- 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 123 
 
 ing (amount to nothing) ; itagd zd dXXa %coa, 
 Saneg Qeol, avdgconot fitozevovcti, in comparison 
 with other animals men live as Gods (beyond 
 other animals) ; hence, beyond, in violation of, 
 contrary to ; itagd zovg vo^iovg, nagd zr\y cpvaiv, 
 itagd zds anov^dg. 
 
 Usgi, around, about. Gen. (about), concern- 
 ing, respecting ; nsgl zovzcov, concerning these 
 things; fid/sadat nsgl nazgiSog, to fight concern- 
 ing, for one's country. In Homer, often above ; 
 nsgl dXXcov, above others. 
 
 Dat. close about ; nsgl zco azijOst dcogaxa st- 
 %zv, he had a coat of mail about his breast ; £<£?>?? 
 icegl za aa^tazt. 
 
 Ace. about, in a looser and more general 
 sense ; oixovvzai nsgl noza^iov, they dwell about 
 the river ; nsgl zovzovg zovg %govovg, about these 
 times ; dpagzdveiv nsgi Tiva, to offend about, in 
 relation to any one ; acoepgovetv nsgl tovs Osovg. 
 
 Ilgog (ngo), to (in, or into the sight of). 
 
 Gen. (from the presence of) from, by, on the 
 part of (a very general relation) ; ngog ivos dg- 
 %£o6cu xdXXiazov • iXsvdsgog lazi ngog nazgog 
 xal ngog fiyzgog, he is free on the part of, as 
 respects his father and his mother ; o,zc Sixato- 
 zazov xal ngog Oecov xal ngog dvdgancov, what- 
 ever is most just, on the part of, in the estimation 
 of Gods and men. 
 
 Dat. close to, near or by; ngog zS nozafxeo* 
 
124 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 (close upon) in addition to ; ngos tovtols, in ad- 
 dition to these things. 
 
 Ace. to, with verbs of motion ; ukyatu ngos 
 tov avSga ■ toward ; ngos ti]v 1)6, toward the 
 east; towards a thing is with reference to a thing, 
 with relation to, on account of, a thing ; ngos 
 TGc^Ta, toward, with reference to, on account of 
 these things ; xaXos ngos dgopov, excellent in re- 
 spect to, or for running; hence used in com- 
 parisons ; ngos deov nidijxos (pavstrat, in respect 
 to God, i. e. in comparison with God, he will ap- 
 pear an ape ; ngos ti}v d^tav ixdarco idiSooav, 
 they gave to each one with respect to, according 
 to, his desert ; against; [.irj XcLxtlU ngos xivrga, 
 do not kick against the pricks. 
 
 c Tno, under. Gen. vno %0ov6s, under the earth 
 (with verbs of rest) ; often bij, to denote the 
 agent with passive verbs ; inaivovvxai vno tcov 
 noXXSv, they are praised by the multitude. 
 
 Dat. close under ; vno jrj nolsi, close under, 
 near to the city ; hence, subject to ; vno ^aatXel 
 zlvai, to be subject to a king. 
 
 Ace. under, with verbs of motion ; vno tovs 
 noSas tov innov xvav vnidga^is * ata/LdTos dvijg 
 vno "Ifaov rjX0e ■ vno tovs amovs %govovs, 
 about the same time. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 125 
 
 § 80. GENERAL SUMMARY. 
 
 We give the following condensed view of 
 the ordinary significations of the prepositions. 
 The student will be careful, however, always 
 to endeavour to trace remoter senses back to 
 the primary, as is partially done in the preced- 
 ing section. 
 
 Prep, with Gen. 
 
 dvxi, over against, — instead of, for. 
 
 dno, from, — springing from (source), after, 
 by reason of, by. 
 
 ix, out of, — from (source), after, in conse- 
 quence of, by means of, by. 
 
 ngo, before, — on behalf of, for. 
 
 Prep, with Dat. 
 Iv, in, — among, on, by. 
 dvv, together with, — with the aid of. 
 
 Prep, with Ace. 
 
 s is, into, — to, toward, against, — with respect 
 to, for. 
 
 dvd, along up, — up to, throughout, during, 
 Dat. (Poet.) upon. 
 
 Prep, with Gen. and Ace. 
 
 Sid, Gen. through, by means of; Ace. (through, 
 Poet.), on account of. 
 
 xazd, Gen. down from, under, against, in re- 
 lation to y Ace. in relation to, according to, at. 
 
126 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 vjtig, Gen. over, above, beyond, on behalf of, 
 in relation to ; Acc. over, beyond. 
 
 Prep, with Gen., Dat., and Ace. 
 
 apcpi, Gen. and Dat. about, concerning, on ac- 
 count of; Acc. about, in the vicinity of 
 
 iiti, Gen. upon, at or by, toward, in the time 
 of; Dat. close upon, by, dependent on, in addi- 
 tion to ; Acc. upon, to, against. 
 
 fisid, Gen. among, together with; Dat. (poet.) 
 among ; Acc. next, after. 
 
 nagd, Gen. from, by (chiefly with persons) ; 
 Dat. with, in presence of, in the estimation of; 
 Acc. to, toward, near, along, in comparison with, 
 beyond, contrary to. 
 
 7Tqos, Gen. on the side of, toward, from, on the 
 part of, by ; Dat. close upon, before, in addition 
 to ; Acc. to, toward, against, for or with refer- 
 ence to. 
 
 Ttsgi, Gen. around, about, concerning; Dat. 
 close about; Acc. about (more loosely). 
 
 V7z6, Gen. under, by ; Dat. close under, subject 
 to; Acc. under (with motion). 
 
 ^ 81. REMARKS ON PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 1. After verbs of motion toward, the prepo- 
 sition generally (though not always) governs the 
 accusative ; with those of rest, a genitive or 
 dative ; as, nagd ftaatXia, to the presence of the 
 king ; nagd ftaaiXu, with or in the presence of 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 127 
 
 the king ; 7? acpaiga ninrsi hit zrjv jgdns'Cav, the 
 ball falls upon the table ; y\ acpatga Tcsixai inl 
 Trjs rgans^g, the ball lies upon the table; r\ 
 acpaiga xsirai inl Tjj jgani£t}, the ball lies close 
 upon (by) the table; i\ acpaiga xvVivdexai vno 
 jgdns'Cav, the ball is rolling under the table ; i\ 
 acpaiga yceijat vno jganifys, the ball lies under 
 the table ; 77 acpaiga xsirai vno TgansZy, the ball 
 lies close under, at the foot of, the table ; iq 
 acpaiga xgspdvvvrai vnig jgansfys, the ball is 
 suspended over the table ; y\ acpaiga ginxszat 
 vnig jgdne£av, the ball is thrown over the table. 
 
 2. Mbxd with the genitive, and avv with the 
 dative both indicate connexion with, but fiexd 
 (from fisaos, middle,) more intimate union, a 
 mutual contact; as, fierd vsxgcov xsiaopai, I shall 
 lie together with, among, in the midst of, the 
 dead. 
 
 3. c Tno, by, is most frequently used to de- 
 note the agent with passive verbs ; vno tov 8tj- 
 piov arscpavovrai, he is crowned by the people; 
 often, however, nagd and ngos with the geni- 
 tive, and sometimes even ix and dno. They 
 are sometimes used in the same way with in- 
 transitive verbs, particularly Ovijaxeiv, to die, 
 and nda%eiv, to suffer; as, vno "JExiogos dnida- 
 vb, he died by Hector. 
 
 4. Kara, against, is used chiefly with refer- 
 ence to speaking, thinking, acting. Motion 
 
128 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 against is expressed by ngos and Ini' Xsyuv 
 ocard tlvos, to speak against any one ; Uvai Ini 
 Tiva, to go against any one. 
 
 § 82. EXAMPLES. 
 1. olxia, house, 
 
 avji Trjs olxias, instead of or for the house. 
 
 and tijs olxias, from the house. 
 
 ix Trjs olxias, out of the house. 
 
 TtQo Trjs olxias, before the house. 
 
 iv jjj olxia, in the house. 
 
 dvv txj olxia, together with the house. 
 
 els Tijv olxiav, into the house. 
 
 dvd xrjv olxiav, throughout the house. 
 
 8cd Trjs olxias, through the house. 
 
 did ti\v olxiav, on account of the house. 
 
 ytaTa ttjs olxias, down from the house. 
 
 ^cctoc ti]v olxtav, at or in the house. 
 
 vnsQ Trjs olxias, (to be) over the house, in re- 
 lation to or for the house. 
 
 vtisq ttjv olxiav, (to go) over or beyond the 
 house. 
 
 dpcpi Trjs olxias, about or concerning the house. 
 
 dficpl Tjj olxia, about the house. 
 
 dfxcpt Tijv olxiav, about the house. 
 
 87TL Trjs olxias, (to be) upon the house. 
 
 Inl Tij olxia, close upon, near to the house. 
 
 inl Tijv olxiav, (to go) upon, to, against the 
 house. 
 
 ^arcc ttjs olxias, together with the house. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 129 
 
 psrd Tats olxiais, (poet.) among the houses. 
 
 (xsTci tijv olxiav, next to the house. 
 
 nagd Trjs oixias, from, by the house. 
 
 Ttagd itfv olxiav, to, toward, near, beyond the 
 house. 
 
 nsgl rrjs oixias, concerning the house. 
 
 nsgl Ttj olxia, close about the house. 
 
 nsgl Tiqv olxiav, about, in the vicinity of the 
 house. 
 
 ngos rijs oixias, on the part of, in relation to 
 the house. 
 
 ngos jy olxia, close upon, near the house. 
 
 ngos t^V olxiav, to, against, with reference to 
 the house. 
 
 vtco jrjs oixias, under the house; vn avdgcn- 
 nov, by a man. 
 
 vno ttj olxia, close under, at the foot of the 
 house. 
 
 vno tt\v olxiav, (to go) under the house. 
 
 2. UoXs^os, rear. 
 
 ix nolspov, (out of) after or in consequence 
 of war. 
 
 did noXspov, through war, by means of war. 
 iv noXspco, in war. 
 els noXspov, into or for war. 
 did noXspov, on account of war. 
 nagd noXsuov, during war. 
 avd noXsuov, during war. 
 11 
 
130 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 xazd noXsp.ov, in relation to war, in war or 
 by war. 
 
 vtzsq 7to?J[Aov, in behalf of, in relation to war. 
 
 ducpi or TiSQi noXsfxov (eivcu), to be occupied 
 about, engaged in tear. 
 
 Ttegl 7toXSfiov 9 concerning war* 
 
 7zq6s tioXe^lov, to or for war. 
 
 paid 710X8 pov, in connexion with war. 
 
 pezd noXepov, after the war. 
 
 3. Sentences. 
 
 JToXXd pot hdcoxsv sis oxgaxov, he gave me 
 many things for an army (to enable me to raise 
 an army). 
 
 Uqos tovs Ogaxas inoXspvaa, I fought against 
 the Thracians. 
 
 'Yrtig Tijg c JEXXd8os htpogovpijv ps& vpcov, 
 on behalf of Greece, I punished them, in con- 
 nexion ivith you. 
 
 * JlcpsXovv Kvgov dvd' cov sv Inadov vn ixsc- 
 vov, I assisted Cyrus in return for the favors 
 which I received from him. 
 
 % AvknvhvGa ex aov, I recovered breath by 
 means of thee. 
 
 ITgos ixstvois tl (pi\g ; what dost thou say in 
 addition to those things ? 
 
 ^TiiajiTevov htl fiacfiXia livai, pi6dcodr\vai 8i 
 ovx B7il tovtco lepaaav, they suspected they were 
 going against the king, and they said they were 
 not hired for this (upon condition of this). 
 
STUDY OP THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 131 
 
 Aid vfigiv avrov ragaTrofxsda ix tov pvSiv 
 xpgovri&iv <dv i/gyv, we are disturbed on account 
 of his insolence, in consequence of not paying the 
 necessary attention to our affairs. 
 
 AvO* &v vpsis V7t£g vficov avrcov TiLiagijcao'dE, 
 in return for which things do you on behalf of 
 yourselves inflict punishment 
 
 § 83. EXERCISES ON PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 1 . 'UksifisTO avrrj rd ddxgva xard 1 rcov ita- 
 gsi&v. H6?*£(ios r(v Kvgcp ngos UsiaiSas xal 
 Mvaovs. Kara ids dvgas tov dgfiarscov dicpgov 
 dvsfiaivev' 2 im to agua, Usigo) opoios nsgl 
 ixslvov elvai, oios Ttsg xal ixstvos negl as. Toi- 
 ovros yivov nsgl rovs yovsis oiovs dv ev^aio 3 
 Ttsgl a s avrov ylvsadai tovs asavrov nalBas. 
 ZtJtsi ry}v ix xov noXifiov dcorngtav Lisrd xaXijs 
 dot-rjs, dXXd lit} psr* aio%gds (prjiivs. ' O cos 7ta- 
 Tijg iv Tjjde t# pid r^isga. l| dcpgovos ocDcpgcov 
 yeyiviirai. 
 
 1 vara, down. — 2 dvsjScuvev, he was mounting. — 3 oiovg 
 av tv^ato, as you would pray, ivish. 
 
 2. Flag* ipoi Ssijasi ds tixnvovv <7vv tols dots 
 rs xal siiots (pilots. — 'Yxig rrjs xafirjs yrjkocpos 
 ijv. O ovv KX£ag%os ovx dvsfiifia'Csv inl tov 
 Xocpov, a?.V V7t 3 avzov drr\Gas to argdzsvtia 
 7iEfX7t£t Avxiov tov Hvgaxovaiov xal dXXov inl 
 tov Xocpov xal xsXsvet, xaridovras rd vvzsg tov 
 Xocpov, ti ioTiv duayyelXaL. Kal 6 Avxios 
 
132 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 TjXacts, xal Idcov dnayyiXXei, oxi cpsvyovotv dvd 
 xgaTOs. — * AnoQvrjaxuv del ngo tov ddixuv. JZov 
 acpcovov xclt ixsivovs tovs %govovs iv toxs ix- 
 xkTjtfiais xadrjfiivov iyco nagtXQcov ikeyov. *Ev 
 tw Osco to tovtov tsXos ijv, ovx iv ifioL 
 
 3. Xenophon's Jnabasis, I. 2. 
 /fid fiiaov tov nagadsioov get 6 Maiavdgos 
 noTapos * al di nijyal avxov elctiv ix tcov fiaat- 
 Xsicov - gel di xal did Tijs KeXaivcov noXecos. 
 Ectl di xal fxsydXov fiaoiXicos j3aGiksia iv Ke- 
 Xaivals igvpvd, inl Tats nijyals tov Magovov 
 TTOTtXfiov, vno Tjj dxgonoXet • gu di xal ovtos 
 Sid ttJs nolEcos, xal ififidkXei els tov Maiavdgov, 
 'JSvTavda XiyeTai ^AnoXXcov ixdetgai Magavav, 
 vix-qdas (avTov) igt£ovTa ol negl oocpias, xal to 
 digfia xgsfidoat iv t6 6ivTgcp y bOev al nijyai' 
 Sid di tovto b noTa^os xaXetTat Magovas. 
 
 4. Xen. Mem. I. 3, 4. 
 
 El di ti do^scev HcoxgaTei ci^iaiveoQai nagd 
 tcov decov, ijttov av ineiodrj l Ttagd 2 rot oij^atvo- 
 fxsva noirjoai, y et tls avTov enetdev 2, odov Xa- 
 fteiv qyepova TvcpXov xal firj eldoTa ti]v odov 
 dvxl ftXinovTOS xal eldoxos* xal tcov dXXcov di 
 ficogiav xaTyjyogei* otTives nagd id vno tcov dscov 
 0ijf.iaLv6i.uva noLovoi t*, cpvXaTTOfievoi Tyv nagd 
 tols dvQgconoLS ddo^lav. Avtos di ndvTa tccv- 
 Ogconiva vnegecoga ngos 5 ti)v nagd tcov Qecov 
 !-v[.iftov)uav. 
 
 1 He would have been leas persuaded. — 2 notQu, contrary 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 133 
 
 to. — 3 Endeavoured to persuade him. — 4 xm xmv alXwv de 
 {MtiqLav xaTtiyoQU, and he accused others too of folly. — 
 5 Tigog, in comparison with. 
 
 § 84. PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSI- 
 TION. 
 
 1. Prepositions compounded with verbs gen- 
 erally add their own import to that of the sim- 
 ple verb ; they also have in composition the 
 same variety of meanings as when standing 
 alone; thus, 'kaufidvuv, to take, [israXafjiftdvsiv, 
 to take in connexion with, to participate ; fiaiveiv, 
 to go, diafiaivsiv, to go through, ixfiaiveiv, to go 
 out, dnofiaLvsiv, to go away, dvaftalvuv, to go 
 up, xajafiaiv&Lv, to go down; xajaXiyetv, to 
 speak against 
 
 2. Exercises on Prepositions in Com- 
 position. 
 
 UagecfTijxs rots fia^OLS id Ovftara. *Ex tov- 
 tov us tovs icpijfiovs £%£g%ovrai. c O Kvgos tivvs- 
 xdXsos tovs ozgaxriyovs. Kvgos, inti ela^Xaoev 
 
 StS Tr\V TtoXtV, p£T£7l£^IC£T0 Hv£VV£OiV 7ZgOS iav- 
 
 tov. JJcoxgdrns negisXQcov, insidrj 01 fiagvvsGdai 
 h'(prf rd oxsXv, icaT£x?uOri vmios, Ov (livovaa i\ 
 xpv%ij iv TW oSfian ovva7io0vrJ6X£i. 3 JSfxoi 86s 
 ravTa oitcos iyco diadco rots jftixicoicus. — "Ojs 
 fiiv £i<jrjXOo(iEv £is zrjv axr/vrjv avTjjs, to ngaiov 
 ov ddyvcd^v avzrjv, as Si dvaoifjvcu avxiqv ixs- 
 X£v<ja{i£v, (jvvav£6T7\aav p.iv aviij ndaai at d(.upi 
 avxijv • 8irjv£yx£ Si ivravda, ngcorov piv, rep p,s- 
 11* 
 
134 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 yiQsi, £7t8Lza di, xal xij dgsrfj. c J2g ovv tovto 
 rjxovctsv y yvvy, nsgLxaTsggifeaTQ ts tov dvcoOsv 
 nenXov, xai dvcodvgaTO ' owave^oijaav di avTjj 
 xal at dpaaL. — *JL (jlsv inlGzaoai, diacpvXaTTE 
 Tats [aXixais ' d di tnj LisiidOyxas, 7tgooXaLi(3av£ 
 tolls iniaxyiiats. Uoxa^tdv diafiaivztv. Kal 
 fiaoiXsvs dxovoas nagd Tiooayigvovs xov Kv- 
 
 gov oxoXov, dvTL7iagS67C8vd£sTO. 
 
 § 85. EXERCISES ON THE PREPO- 
 SITIONS. 
 
 English into Greek. 
 All good things 1 come from God. The mes- 
 senger ivas sent 2 by the king. From war are 
 many evils. With thee is a fountain of life. 
 The river of life is from the throne of God, and 
 near it is the tree of life. After ivar is peace, 
 after day night, after life death. He departed 3 
 from the city, and went through the plain to the 
 river. I sit {xddi^iat) by the side of the old 
 man. 4 The sun moves 5 above 6 the earth. All 
 injustice is contrary to the laiv of God. Thy law 
 is in my heart. Peace shall be with you. The 
 brave man 7 fights for his country, but the cow- 
 ard prefers his own safety to 8 (before) that of 
 his country. I lead d the army along the river. 
 
 1 niivra tu uyafiu. — 2 aJtoatiXXto. — 3 anioxo^im. — 4 Otd 
 man, vtQWV. — 5 Moves, noQfvnai. — G Above, vjtsq with 
 Gen. — 7 Brave man, avdyeioq. — 8 The coward prefers 
 . . . . to, b dedog cuouzvll .... nqo. — 9 1 lead, uyw. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 135 
 
 Jin eye for an eye, and a tooth 1 for a tooth. 
 Virtue instead of beauty, 2 and happiness instead 
 of pleasure. On account of fear I am not able 
 to speak. Move us is the heaven, and beneath 
 us is the earth. I descended from the mountain 
 and brought a tree with me. What ye hear in 
 the darkness, speak in the light. A certain one, 
 selling* a house, carried around a stone from it 
 for a sample. 4 Those who dwell 5 about the river 
 know nothing concerning these things. On ac- 
 count of the death of the Cyclops? Jlpollo was 
 sent down 7 from heaven into the earth, and 
 served 8 in Thessaly with Mmetus. 
 
 1 A tooth, odovg. — 2 Beauty, xaXXog. — 3 Selling, timIwv. 
 — 4 uq dtl'/ficc. — 5 ol oixovvTtg. — 6 iw/' KvxXanojv. — 7 Was 
 sent down, xaTtne^cfd^T]. — 8 Served, s&rjjsvoev. 
 
 % 86. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 
 1. Fables. 
 
 Avxos Idcov 7toi[iivas iadiovias Iv axwvj} ngo- 
 fiazov, iyyvs tzqogeXO&v, r\kixos, 1 kepi], av -qv do- 
 gvfios, el lyco tovto Inoiovv ! 
 
 Akaiva, ovsidi^ofievn vito aXanexos, ini to 2 
 did Ttavjos 3 eva tlxtslv, £W, hfpyj, dXXd Xiovxa. 
 
 1 ifkhoc — &6qv($oq, what a tumult there ivould be. — 
 2 inl to — tUtuv, for her bringing forth. — 3 xqovov un- 
 derstood, in all her lifetime. 
 
136 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 2. Anecdotes. 
 
 : AgioTimtos igcoTTjdds, Tiva eotIv, a dsi tovs 
 7tatSag Liavddvsiv, scpi], ots 1 avdgss yevousvoi 
 
 %Q7jGOVTGU. ^AvTLGdhnjS EQtoTljdsU, TL TCJV [Xadlj- 
 
 LiaTav avayxaioTCiTOv, ecpyjy to xaxd djioiiaduv. 
 Zjjvcov ngos to 2 cplvagovv Lieigdxiov, did tovto, 
 tins, 8vo oia e%olisv, oiotia 8i IV, iva tiXelco 
 Liiv uxovcoluv, TJnova 8e Xsyaiisv. 'y/giazoTsXjfs 
 oveidt^oiuvo? 710TS oil Tiovijgco dvdgconco eXz^Lio- 
 6vvijv kdaxev, oh tov jgonov, eopi], dXXd tov av- 
 dgaizov ijXeijaa. UXdrav ogyi^ofisvos tzots tgj> 
 oix£Tt}, i7tLGTavTog s Eevoxgdiovs, Aa/3«V, 4 Zopi], 
 Tovjov. iiaoziycoaov * eyco ydg ogyi'CoLiat. 
 
 1 oig . . . . xgrjaovTcu, what they will use. — 2 nqbg to, to 
 the talkative, Sfc. — 3 iniOToiviog, standing by. — 4 lupwv 
 toiiTov, taking this person, or take this person and. 
 
 3. Plato's Gorgias, ch. 79. 
 
 °J2ozisg "OfiijQOS Xsyei, dLSvei/xavTO xr^v dgyjpr 
 6 Zsvs xal 6 Uoaeidav xal 6 TIXoviiov, intiS)} 
 nagd tov naigos nagtXafiov • yv ovv votiog ode 
 Ttsgl dvdgcojicov ercl Kgovov, 1 xal del xal vvv sxi 
 IdTiv Iv Osols, t6v dvdgcoTtov tov iaev dixaias 
 tov ftiov diskQovTa xal ogicos, iiteiddv tsXsvtijGtj, 
 is iiaxdgcov vijaov? dmovTa olxsiv iv ndar} sv- 
 daiiiovia IxTog xaxav, tov 3s ddixcog xal ddecos 
 ElS to Tijg Ttoscog ts xal dixijs dedLicoTijgiov, o dij 
 Tagiagov xaXovoiv, lev at. 
 
 1 inl Kooroi'j in the time of Saturn. 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 137 
 
 4. From Isocrates. 
 Zevs r HgaxXea xai TdvTakov yevvqaas (as 
 ot livOol Xeyovdi xai ndvTes mOTevovoi) tov Liev, 
 8id Tiqv dgsTrji', dddvazov enoin\Ge ' tov Se, Sta 
 Trjv xaxtav, tolls fxeytOTacs Tifxcogcais exokaoev. 
 01$ %gij Tcaga8eiy^a6t %gco[iivovs ogeyeodai Trjs 
 xaXoxayadias ' xai [xtf liovov tols vcp* r}ficov 
 elgrjfisvois ififiivecv, dXXd xai tcdv 71olt^tcov toc 
 fieXTiOTa LiavOdveiv, xai tcjv dXXcov cocptOTcov, 
 €i ti ygrpuiov elgrjxaaiv, avayiyvacxeiv. "Sloneg 
 ydg tj\v fisXiTTav ogSfiev ecp* ditavTa [xev rot 
 filaGTifttaTa xaOi^dvovoav, dcp' exaOTOV 8e tcc 
 Xgtfoiua XaLtfidvovoav • ovtco %gr) xai tovs 7iai- 
 8eias ogeyo^tevovs {MjSevos Liev aTteigas eyetv, 
 navTayodev 8e Ta ygrjaifia ovXXeyeiv. MoXls 
 ydg dv tls ex raim^s Trjs euL^ieXeias rots Trjs cpv- 
 cecos dpagTias e7itxgaTr\6etev. 
 
 5. Xenophon. Cyr. I. ii. 6. 
 
 Ot 7tat8es tcov UegaSv, oi els tcc 8i8aaxaXela 
 (potTcovTES, 8idyovoi pavOdvovxes Sixaioovviyv • 
 xai Xeyovai, oxi eni tovto sq%ovtou, Soneg nag* 
 r]^ilv oi xd ygdfifiaTa (.taQijoo^ievoi. Oi 8i dg- 
 %ovtes avTav SiaTeXovai to nXelCTov Tjjs r/tiegas 
 Sixd^ovTes avTols. TiyveTou ydg Si} xai natal 
 ngos dXXtfXovs, Saiteg dvSgdoiv, eyxXY\{iaTa xai 
 xXonrjs xai dgnayip, xai (3cas xai dndxijs xai 
 xaxoXoytas xai aXXcov, oicov 8r] eixos. Ovs 8° 
 dv yvcdoi tovtcov ti d8ixovvTas, T^icogovvTai. 
 
138 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
 
 KaXd'CovdL di xal ovs av ddixm iyxalovvTas 
 svgioxacii. 
 
 6. Id. 
 AixaXovoi di xal iyxXypaTOS, ov evsxa civ- 
 OgcoTtot {.uoovoi fxiv dXXyjXovs paXiaTa, dtxd£ov- 
 xat di {jxioja, ayagiCTias ' xal ov av yvcoai 
 dvvdfjisvov fxiv ydgiv ditodidovai, ^uj dnodtdovTa 
 di, xoXd^ovai xal tovtov toyvgas. Otovxai ydg 
 tovs dyagiOTOvs xal rtsgl deovs av fidXioia 
 dueXas iystv, xal negl yovkas xal naxgida xal 
 cptXovs. zfiddaxovai Si tovs naidas xal ococpgo- 
 dvvijv. 
 
 7. 
 To f.tiv ygvoiov iv tS nvgl fiadavifrfASv, tovs 
 di cptXovs iv Tats aTvyiais diayiyvGJGxopsv. — 
 Isocrates. 
 
 /did tovto otfiai ijf.ias naidas ovxas tcc? tcov 
 nonjTcov yvapas ixpavddvsiv, iv* dvdgss ovtss 
 avxals ygcouzda. — JEschines. 
 
 To ipov oapa, a Ttaldes, oTav TsXeviijaa, [iifos 
 iv xgvciid OfjTS, {.irjTS iv dgyvgco {.ii\ts iv dXXcp 
 {iijdsvl, dXXd Tjj 2'i} ®s id/iora duodois. Tc 
 ydg tovtov [laxaguoTEgov tov yq Luydijvai, ij 
 ndvTa idv Ta xaXd, ndvxa di t ay add (pvst ts 
 xal Tgi(psi ; 'jEyco di xal dXXcos cpiXdvOgcouos 
 iysvotnjv^ xal vvv fjdscos av iioc doxst xotvavi)- 
 6ai tov zvtgyzTOvi'TOS dvdgconovs. — XenopnOfl, 
 
STUDY OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 139 
 
 8. 
 
 ^ItfoxgdiTj? xaxicrtov ag%ovTa elsysv stvcu, tov 
 dg%£iv iavzov fir} Svvdfxevov. 'EgcoTrjQels, did 
 noiav ahiav tovs aXXovs Siddoxav Xkyuv^ avzos 
 dtcoTta, ecpri • xal ydg y\ dxovrj avxiq [iiv ov t£- 
 [ivei, id 8i %'icpri 6%sa nouL 3 J?gcoT?]d£is, tlvi oi 
 cpiXoTtovoL tcov gaOvfjHov ScacpEgovcfiv ; slubv, cos 
 ol svoefisis tcov dG£J3cov, iXntoiv dyadals. 'ISeov 
 veaviav (piXoTiovovvxa, scpr} ■ xdXXiOTOv orpov tS 
 yqgcLTi dgivsis. AdXov tivos a%oXd'CsLv nag" 
 cci^tw (3ovXo{i£vov, diriovs fjirjCts fxiodovg • tov 
 Si T}jv ahiav nvdo^isvov • "Eva [iiv (Jcprf)^ iva 
 XaXsiv pddijs, tov 8i BTsgov, iva oiydv. 
 
VOCABULARY 
 
 12 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 dyaOog, rj, ov, good ; brave. 
 
 dydnr\, ??s, ??, love. 
 
 dyysXos, ov, 6, a messenger. 
 
 dykwryxog, ov, 6, 7/, (yevvdco) unbegotten* 
 
 ™ Ayis, idos, 6, Agis. 
 
 dyxvga, as, 77, an anchor. 
 
 dyco, di-a, jj%a and dyrjo%a, yyfxai, Ear. Aor* 
 
 i\yayov, to lead ; to drive ; dye, come on. 
 dySv, avog, 6, a contest, a combat; a game. 
 dycovifrfAou, oopou, rjyavLOfjiai, to contend, to 
 
 fight for a prize. 
 dSsXcpGs, ov, 6, a brother. 
 aSrjs, ov, 6, Hades, the infernal world. 
 ddixia, jjgco, ffdtxrjxa, (dixy) to do injustice, to 
 
 injure. 
 d8ixr][.ia, axog, to, an act of injustice, an offence. 
 dSixia, as, jj, injustice, injury. 
 dSixog, ov, 6, if, unjust. 
 dSixag, unjustly. 
 
 dSogia, as, rj, (<$o'Ja) want of reputation; dishonor, 
 a&a, a 00, (contr. from as Id a) to sing. 
 
144 VOCABULARY. 
 
 dsl and aki, always. 
 
 dddvarog, ov, 6, 7), (ddvazog) immortal. 
 
 ddscog, (Oeog) impiously; wickedly. 
 
 'AOrjvai, cov, at, Athens. 
 
 ^ Adnvalog, a, ov, Athenian, 
 
 dOXrjjrfs, ov, 6, (ddXog, a combat) a wrestler, a 
 
 combatant in the games. 
 'Adas, 00, 6, Athos, a mountain. 
 Atyvmog, ov, 77, Egypt. 
 AiyvTixiog, ov, 6, Egyptian. 
 aidsoficu, ovpai, aidaooficu, j}8£6[jlou, y8iodrfv, (at- 
 
 Sas) to respect, to reverence; to be ashamed. 
 aldcog, ov?, 7), respect, reverence, decorum, mod- 
 esty, shame. 
 aixt'Co, Pass, opou, to treat with ignominy, to 
 
 torture, to harass. 
 algsrog, i\, ov, eligible ; preferable. 
 cdgkco, 00, 7J600, fjgijxa, Ear. Jlor. stkov, to take, 
 
 to seize ; Mid. aigioftai, ovfxai, stXofi^v, to 
 
 take to one's self, to choose. 
 alo/gog, d, ov, ugly ; base, disgraceful. 
 alo%vvri, 77?, 7), shame, disgrace ; modesty. 
 aicf%vvG), woo, j}<j%vyxa, to shame, Jtfid. alo%vvo- 
 
 fiat, to be ashamed of; to reverence. 
 alxsco, co, t\cco, jjzijxa, to ask. 
 atria, a?, y, a cause. 
 aicov, covos, 6, time, a space of time ; an age ; 
 
 eternity. 
 dxLvdxijg, ov, 6, a Persian sword, a scimetar. 
 dxov7\, ijg, 7), a whetstone. 
 
VOCABULARY. 145 
 
 dxovco, aytovaopai, dxrfxoa, to hear ; Per/. Pass. 
 
 7}X0VG[A.0U. 
 
 dxgoTtoXis, sas, ^, (dxgos, noXis) an upper tow- 
 er, a citadel. 
 
 dxTrj, jjs, r/, (ayvvfii, ciyco, to break) a broken, 
 rocky shore, a shore. 
 
 dXijSsia, as, ?), truth, 
 
 dXtjdjjg, iog, ovg, 6, fy true. 
 
 dX-qdag, truly. 
 
 dXxrj, strength, vigor. 
 
 dXXd, but. 
 
 dXXvXcov, ovg, of each other; JYom. not used. 
 
 d'XXog, n, o, another; ol dXXoi, the rest (ceteri). 
 
 dXXcog, otherwise, in other respects. 
 
 dXoyiaxog, ov, o, v], (a priv. and Xoyog) irration- 
 al, inconsiderate. 
 
 aAoK^f, sxog, iJl, a fox. 
 
 dfiadjjs, iog, 6, ?J, (uavddva) unlearned, ignorant. 
 
 dfiadia, as, 77, ignorance. 
 
 d^iagxdvco, d^iagT^Ga, rjfidgTwxa, Ear. Aor. rjfiotg- 
 tov, to err ; to miss ; to commit offence. 
 
 d^aoita, as, 77, error, fault; sin. 
 
 dpsXas, ((.tiXsi, curae est) negligently, careless- 
 ly ; dueXag l%uv, to be neglectful. 
 
 dpa\xcog, ogog, 6, iq, (pr(ing) motherless. 
 
 d^nsXav, covog, 6, a vineyard. 
 
 dv, employed with verbs, gives to them the idea of 
 uncertainty and mere possibility ; thus, sXeyov, 
 I was speaking, sXsyov dv, I would be speak- 
 ing; fjXQov, I came, -qXdov dv, I would have 
 12* 
 
146 VOCABULARY. 
 
 come ; Xiyot^a, I might speak, Xkyoiiii dv, 1 
 
 might perhaps speak. 
 oi v, for idv or rjv, if, distinguished from the for- 
 mer by beginning a clause, 
 dvafiaivco, fitfoopou, ftsfinxa, Ear. Aor. dvefinv, 
 
 (j3aivcd) to go up, to ascend. 
 dvafiifidZco, doco, (/3t/3a£b, j3d£co, fiaivco, fidco) to 
 
 cause to ascend. 
 dvaytyvcooxco, yvaooLiai, syvcoxa, (yiyvaoxco) 
 
 Ear. Aor. dviyvcov, to read. 
 dvayxaios, a, ov, necessary, unavoidable. 
 dvdyxij, i]9, 7], necessity. 
 dva^, xzos, 6, a king, a prince. 
 dveifAL, Inf. dvuvai, Part, dvicov, Imp erf. Past. 
 
 dvrjziv, (dvd, sifxi, to go, see ^61) to go up, 
 
 to ascend. 
 dvefxos, ov, 6, wind. 
 dvsv, with gen., without. 
 dvEVQLGxcQ, gijoco, Aor. dvsvgov, (evgitixco) to find 
 
 out, to discover. 
 dvijg, dvdgos, 6, a man. 
 dvdos, eog ovs, to, a flower. 
 dvOgcoTzivos, n, ov, pertaining to man, human. 
 dvOgconos, ov, 6, a human being, a man. 
 dviagos, a, ov, {dvia, sadness, trouble) sad, 
 
 troublesome. 
 dvida, co, daco, to cause pain, to grieve (rivd) 
 
 any one ; Mid. dvico^iai, to grieve. 
 dvLoiijf.a, aujaco, iarrfxa, (loivlii) to set up, to 
 
 raise up ; dvaoifp'ai, to rise. 
 
VOCABULARY. 147 
 
 dvoSygofiou, Aor. Mid. dvadvgdfjiriv, (oSvgopai, 
 odvgco) to wail aloud. 
 
 avxiXkya, |», to speak against, to contradict. 
 
 dvTiTZOLQOLGXBvd'CcD) doco, (oxsvd^o, oxsvos) to pre- 
 pare against; Mid. to prepare one's self 
 against. 
 
 * AvTioQkvr\s, sos ovs, Antisthenes. 
 
 dvxQov, ov, to, a cavern. 
 
 dvaOev, from above ; upper. 
 
 dj-ios, a, ov, worthy. 
 
 dogdrog, ov, 6, 7], (ogdco, to see) invisible. 
 
 dnayyilXa, sXco, TiyysXxa, (dyysXXco) to bear 
 back word, to report. 
 
 ditallayri, i^s, 7), a release, liberation. 
 
 dnaXXaTTot), d^co, dnr(XXa^a, Ear. Aor. Pass, 
 dmiXXdyriv, to liberate, to free ; Mid. ditaX- 
 XdzxEodat, to depart. 
 
 anas, aoa, av, all, every. 
 
 dndzr), lis, 77, (dnaTaco, to deceive) deception, 
 fraud, deceit. 
 
 dndjcog, ogos, 6, 7), (jtajrig) without a father. 
 
 djiEL^Li, Inf. dndvai, Part, dnicov, (ano, eifii, to 
 go, see ^ 61) to go away, to depart. 
 
 dnsigas (dnsigos, inexperienced, not having 
 proved) %x uv dnatgcos twos, to be unac- 
 quainted with any thing. 
 
 dnkgxoyLai, iXevooftai, ifajkvda, Aor. d7Zrjh0ov 9 
 (sg%o[iai) to go away, to depart. 
 
 dno^dklw, (3aha, fiifiktixa, (fidkXa) to cast 
 away, to loose. 
 
148 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ditodiBgdaxco, Sgdaa, dsdgaxa, (Sgdu) Aor. dnk- 
 
 dgdv, to run away (as a servant). 
 aitodidcoui, daoco, SsSaxa, (Si8a(.u) to give back, 
 
 to restore, to pay ; Mid. djzodiSofiai, to sell. 
 dnodvyaxco, OavovfxaL, (dvijoxa) to die ; Jlor, 
 
 dnidavov. 
 dnoxzeLvco, sva, dnixzova, LaL Jlor. ditixzeiva, 
 
 (xzelvco) to slay. 
 dnoXunco, \pa, XiXoina and XeXsupa, Aor. eXinov, 
 
 (Xeluco) to leave behind, to abandon. 
 dnoXXvpi, (oXXv[ii) oXcj, aXsxa, Jlor. aXeaa, to 
 
 destroy ; Mid. dnoXXvixcu, oXovpac, Aor. dno- 
 
 Xo^v, to perish. So Ear. Per/. Act. dnoXco- 
 
 Aa, I am undone, I perish. 
 ^noXXcov, avog, 6, Apollo. 
 dnofiavOdvco (duo, fiavOdva) to unlearn. 
 d7to6TsXXcd, eXa, diieozaXxa, Lat. Aor. dnkaxuXa, 
 
 (aziXXa) to send forth, to send away. 
 dnoocpdzzco, acpd^co, (ocpdzzco) to slaughter, to 
 
 murder, to stab ; Mid. dnoacpdzzoiiai, to stab 
 
 one's self. 
 aTZOTvyydva, zev^ofxai, Ear. Aor. duezv/ov, (zvy- 
 
 %dva) to fail of, not to obtain. 
 ditocptvycd) (p8v^of.iai, djionecpsvya, Aor. dnicpv- 
 
 yov, (duo, (pevyco) to flee away, to escape. 
 dnzco, dipa, yep a, Jlor. r/ya, to fasten or appty 
 
 one thing to another, hence to kindle, to set 
 
 on fire, by bringing the torch in contact with 
 
 the fire ; Mid. dnzopiou, to connect one's self 
 
 with, to lay hold of, to cling to. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 149 
 
 "Agyog, ovg, to, Argos, a city in Argolis. 
 
 * Agyog, ov, 6, Argus. 
 
 dgyvgog, ov, 6, silver. 
 
 dgsoxco, dgioco, ijgsopou, rjgiddriv, to please.. 
 
 dgeirj, rjg, rj) virtue. 
 
 : Agiddvii, rig, i), Ariadne. 
 
 AgioTimiog, ov, 6, Aristippus*. 
 
 agiorog, rj, ov, best. 
 
 ^ Agi6ToxkXy\g, sog, 6, Aristotle. 
 
 olgfxa, axog, to, a chariot. 
 
 agfidisLos, a, ov, pertaining to a chariot. 
 
 *Ag[iovia, as, ?i, Harmonia. 
 
 dgnayrj^ ijg, r), (dgrttiXco) a seizure, robbery. 
 
 dgg-qv, svog, 6, i), male. 
 
 agrvco, voco, rjgzvxa, (ago, to join, to fit) to join, 
 
 to put together, to prepare. 
 dg%rj, ijg, yj, a beginning, a taking the lead, a 
 
 government. 
 agxa, |«, r^g/a, to begin, to take the lead of, to 
 
 govern ; Mid. dg^ofxai, to begin (for one's 
 
 self). 
 6ig%cov, ovjog, 6, a ruler, a magistrate. 
 dasfiijg, sog, 6, tj, (ozfia) impious. 
 doOsvico, co, rjaco, rJGdsvrjxa, (adivog, strength) 
 
 to be weak, to be sick. 
 dadsvrjg, eg, iog, 6, r), weak, infirm, sick. Comp. 
 
 doOevsojegog. 
 daxsa, co, ?jaco, ijaxrixa, to exercise, to train, to 
 
 practise. 
 doTtjg, sgog, 6, a star. 
 
150 VOCABULARY. 
 
 daxv, sos, to, a city. 
 
 ^Aazvay-qs, sos, 6, Astyages. 
 
 dacpaXijs, sos, 6, ?), (alalia) safe, secure* 
 
 ^Aigdhjs, ov, 6, Atrides, son of Atreus. 
 
 dzv%ia. a?, ^, (rvyrj) misfortune. 
 
 avzos, jj, 6, self (ipse) ; with the article, the 
 
 same ; in the oblique cases alone, him, her, it ; 
 
 see § 21 ; tolvtol, these things ; ravid (id 
 
 avid), the same things. 
 dcpavijs, ios, 6, tj, (cpacvco) not conspicuous, 
 
 obscure, invisible. 
 d(fioTr\iii, duoaTijaco, dpiazyxa, Aor. dnkaxiiv, to 
 
 remove, to cause to withdraw ; Mid. dfpioxa- 
 
 pou, to withdraw, to cease from. 
 'AcpgoSix-n, r/s, y, Venus. 
 
 dipgoovvy], ys, 7j, (dcpgav) folly, want of sense. 
 acpgcov, ovos, ((pQi\v) senseless, foolish. 
 d(pcovog, ov, 6, ?j, (cpavij) without voice, dumb, 
 
 speechless. 
 d%aQL6Tia, as, i], (%dgis) ingratitude. 
 d%dgioios, ov, 6, rj, ungrateful. 
 a/do^ac, scoriae, (ayQos, dyco) to be burdened, 
 
 to grieve, to be disgusted. 
 
 B. 
 
 jiadvs, sta, v, deep. 
 
 fidXka, fiaXrx), /3i/3A?pa, Aor. sfiaXov, to cast, to 
 
 throw, to shoot. 
 fiagvs, sia, v, heavy, oppressive. 
 fidgos, eos, to, a weight, a burden. 
 
VOCABULARY. 151 
 
 fiagvvu, vva, fiefidgvyxa, (fiagvs) to burden, to 
 weigh down, to oppress ; Mid. fiagvvopai, to 
 become heavy. 
 
 f}aaavt£a>, lao, (fidaavos, a touchstone) to try 
 by applying to a touchstone, to try, to prove. 
 
 fiaoiXeia, as, i\, a reign, a kingdom. 
 
 fiaoiXuov, ov, to, and fiariXsia, ov, rd, a royal 
 abode, a palace. 
 
 fiaoiXsvs, ass, 6, a king. 
 
 fisfiaios, ov, 6, ifa and os, a, ov, firm, sure, per- 
 manent. 
 
 (SsXos, sos, to, ((3dXXo), a missile weapon. 
 
 fieXriav, ovos, 6, ??, (dyadds) better; fiaXTiGtos, 
 best. 
 
 flia, as, i\, force, violence. 
 
 fitos, ov, 6, life, a livelihood. 
 
 fiXafisgos, a, ov, (fiXa^y, fiXaTtzco,) injurious. 
 
 fiXdma, yja, fisfiXacpa, to injure. 
 
 (3Xdozr][.ia, atos, to, (ftXaozdvco) a bud, shoot, 
 flower. 
 
 fiXsTtco, yja, fisfiXeya, to look at, to see, to behold. 
 
 Botox ia, as, rj, Bceotia. 
 
 fioxgvs, vos, 6, a cluster of grapes. 
 
 fioyXopat, fiovXijaopai, fiefiovXrjpai, to will, to 
 choose. 
 
 fiovs, fioos, 6, tf, an ox, a cow, a bull. 
 
 figaSsas, (figadvs, slow) slowly. 
 
 figa%vs, sia, v, short, brief. 
 
 figovxij, ijs, r\, thunder. 
 
 P&pos, ov, 6, an altar. 
 
152 VOCABULARF. 
 
 r. 
 
 ydg, for. 
 
 yacmjg, egos, 7), a belly, stomach. 
 
 yi gives emphasis and distinctness to the word 
 ivith which it is connected, certainly, particu- 
 larly, at least. 
 
 ysXdco, co, doco, ysyiXaxa, to laugh. 
 
 ysvszi], TJg, 71, (yivog) birth. 
 
 ysvvaiog, a, ov, noble, excellent. 
 
 ysvvatcog, nobly ; courageously. 
 
 ysvvdco, co, r\oco, yeyivvtixa, to beget, to produce. 
 
 yivog, sog, ovg, to, a race, descent, kind. 
 
 yicpvga, as, 7), a bridge. 
 
 yi\, yrjg, 7), the earth ; a land. 
 
 yr\ko(pog, ov, 6, (yrj, Xocpog, a hill) a rising ground, 
 a hill. 
 
 yrjgag, axog, to, old age. 
 
 ytyvofiai, (yivco obs.) ysvijaofiaL, ykyova, Pass. 
 yeyevTipou, Ear. Aor. Mid. iysvoprjv, to be- 
 come, to happen. 
 
 yiyvcooxco, yvcooofiai, eyvcoxa, Aor. syvcov, to know. 
 
 yXvxvg, eia, v, sweet, Comp. yXvxicov. 
 
 ylcoGoa, 77s, i\, the tongue.. 
 
 yvcopii, 7ig, 7), (yvoco, id. qu. yiyvcodxco) senti- 
 ment, opinion, judgment. 
 
 yovevg, sag, 6, (yevco, yiyvopai) a generator, a 
 father ; ol yovsig, parents. 
 
 ygcua, as, 7), (ytgaiog) an old woman. 
 
 ygdp^ia, axog, to, (ygdcpco) any thing written, 
 
VOCABULARY. 1 53 
 
 writing ; PL to, ygd^aia^ letters, literature, 
 
 the elements of knowledge. 
 ygdya, vjco, ysygacpa, to write, to paint. 
 rgvllos, ov, 6, Gryllus. 
 yvvrj, yvvaixos, r\, a woman. 
 
 J. 
 
 8aiu.av, ovos, 6, a divinity, daemon* 
 
 8dxva, (8ax, 8nx) Sr^o^ai, 8i8n%a, s8axov, Pass. 
 
 Sidijyiiai, to bite. 
 8dxgvov, ov, to, a tear. 
 Saxgvco, vaco, to shed tears, to weep. 
 ddpafas, scos, r\, a heifer. 
 davaos, ov, 6, Danaus. 
 
 Javaoi, ov, ot, descendants of Danaus, Grecians. 
 8s, a particle of connection, whether copulative or 
 
 disjunctive ; an d > b u t. 
 8sl, Subj. Ssy, Opt. 8soi, Inf. 8stv, Part. 8sov, 
 
 Fut. dsrfcsi, it is necessary. 
 8si8o, 8sioofiai, 8£8ia and Ssdocxa, to fear, Perf 
 
 8s8oixa, I fear. 
 8slxvv(al, 8si^co, Perf. Pass. 8i8siy{iai, to show. 
 8siX6s, r\, ov, (8si8a, to fear) cowardly, timid. 
 8sivos, r\, ov, (8sos, fear) fearful, dreadful ; 
 
 hence applied to any thing which inspires strong 
 
 feeling, as mighty, powerful, grievous, strange; 
 
 as, 8siv6s Xsysiv, mighty to speak ; 8sivos igsv- 
 
 gstv nogovs, skilful to find out expedients. 
 
 Comp. 8sLvorsgos, Sup. 8stv6jaios. 
 8sxa, ten. 
 
 13 
 
154 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Ssxami^vs, v, (dsxa, 7tfj%vs) ten cubits long. 
 
 dsg^ia, arog, to, a skin, a hide. 
 
 deopcjTiJQLOv, ov, to, (dea^iog, a bond, 8ico, to 
 bind) a prison. 
 
 SsctTioT?]?, ov, b, a master, a lord. 
 
 de^o^ai, digopou, osdsyfiou, to receive. 
 
 8ij (contr. from ijdjj), at this moment, already, 
 at once ; hence introduced constantly to give 
 liveliness and vigor to discourse; answers to 
 our you see, indeed, fyc. 
 
 dijfiooOivijs, so?, ovg, Demosthenes. 
 
 Siafiaivco, (Sjjaofiat, fisp?ixa 9 ddfiiiv, (fiaiva) to 
 go through, to cross over. 
 
 SiayiyvcoaxcD, yvaxjopat, syvcoxa, (yiyvactxco) to 
 distinguish. 
 
 bidyo, |«, to lead through, to lead across ; with 
 ellipsis of xqovov, to spend one's time, to 
 continue. 
 
 diaycoviZopaL, lao^iai, dniyavicificu, to keep con- 
 tending. 
 
 dLadtdofu, Satico, dedcoxa, (3idco[.u) to distribute. 
 
 didkvGLs, sag, i), (Xvco, to loose) separation, dis- 
 solution. 
 
 diaXvcD, aco, dialslvxa, (Xvco) to dissolve. 
 
 diagiivG), a, diapsfisvTjxa, (fxiva) to remain, to 
 stay, to continue. 
 
 diavipa, a, dcavevs^ajxa, to share, to allot, to 
 distribute. 
 
 Siatixditjco, vjco, (dxaitTCd) to dig through, un- 
 dermine. 
 
VOCABULARY. 155 
 
 SiaTdtfciG), |«, 8iaTSTa%a, (xdaaco) to dispose, to 
 arrange, to regulate. 
 
 Siarslsco, 6, idco, diaTSisksxa, (isXico) to accom- 
 plish, to continue, or spend one's time ; 8ia- 
 reksL pavddvcdv, he spends his time learning. 
 
 8iaTgi(3cd, yjco, Siarezgifa, Per/. Pass. Tszgifi- 
 fiou, (rgifia) to wear away, to consume, to 
 spend time. 
 
 8iacpigo, oitico, Aor. 8ijjvsyxa, (cpsgco) to differ, 
 to surpass. 
 
 8iacpvXdTTco, %co, ((fvXduco, (pvXa^ a guard) to 
 continue guarding, to preserve. 
 
 8i8aoxaletov, ov, to, a place of instruction, a 
 school. 
 
 8t8daxaKo? i ov, 6, a teacher. 
 
 8i8doxa>, 8i8d%eo, 8s8[8a%a, 8e8t8a/fia^ to teach. 
 
 8180^1, 8acico, 8i8coxa, to give. 
 
 Sieg/opou, iXsvaofiat, ifajXvda, Aor. 8ifjX0ov, to 
 go through. 
 
 8ixd£a, acta, (81x11, justice) to judge, to adminis- 
 ter justice, to pronounce sentence ; Mid. 81- 
 xd£opou, to conduct a suit. 
 
 8txaios, cc, oi/, just. 
 
 8ixaio<jvv?f, ?/s, ji, justice. 
 
 8txaicjg, justly. 
 
 SixatiTris, ot/, 6, a judge. 
 
 dixy, ij?, i], justice, a suit at law. 
 
 Jioyivqs, eog, 6, Diogenes. 
 
 8ioLxico, to, tfcfco, 8icpx7ixa, (olxos) to regulate 
 household affairs, to dispose, to administer. 
 
156 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Stogvaaco, £co, 8uogv%a, (ogvodco) to dig through. 
 
 8ts, twice. 
 
 8ltt6s, i\, ov, and 8iaa6s, double. 
 
 8icpgos, ov, 6, (8 is and cpsgco, dicpogos, bearing- 
 two) a charioteer's seat. 
 
 8lvjos, sos, to, (8tvja) thirst. 
 
 8t6xco, £co, 8s8ico/a, to pursue. 
 
 Sficoij, ijs, i\, a maid- servant. 
 
 8oxsco, co, 86%co, Perf. Pass. SeSoypai, to think, 
 to seem ; 8oxsc, it seems good ; dedoxrou, it 
 is resolved upon. 
 
 86£a, ijs, i\, an opinion, estimation, reputation, 
 glory. 
 
 8ovXos, ov, 6, a slave, a subject of despotic power. 
 
 dvvapou, 8vvij<jo^ai, dsdvvrtfiou, e8vvijQijv, to be 
 able ; Part. 8vvd[isvos. 
 
 8vvadxua, as, ij, (dvyaficu) power, official au- 
 thority, sway. 
 
 8vo and 8vco, two. 
 
 dvopai, SvdQfidij iSvad^v, (8vg>, to submerge) 
 to go under, to set ; as the sun, from his be- 
 ing supposed to sink in the ocean. 
 
 dvc>zv%sed, to, i]aoo, (8vs and tv%v, fortune) to be 
 unfortunate. 
 
 8v<jTv%ia, as, 1), misfortune. 
 
 8oogov, ov, to', (86co, 8i8ca^u) a gift. 
 
 lav, icith Subj. if. 
 
 iavTov, i}s, ov, of himself, herself, fyc. 
 
VOCABULARY. 157 
 
 lyyvs, with Gen. near. 
 
 iyxakia, S, iao, lyxkxhixa, (xakico) to accuse, 
 to inculpate. 
 
 zyxfajfia, arog, to, a charge, an accusation. 
 
 iyco, ifiov or fiov, I. 
 
 si, if, with Ind. and Opt. 
 
 si'da (obs.), Ear. Aor. siSov, to see. See ogdo. 
 
 sidaXov, (sldos, a form) an image, a picture. 
 
 sldcos, knowing, Per/. Part, from olda, quod vide. 
 
 stxco, to be like, to resemble, to seem ; soixa, it 
 seems, it resembles. 
 
 slxos, o'tos, to', that which is like, that which is 
 probable, natural. 
 
 slxeiv, ovog, ?), an image. 
 
 stfii, to be. See § 65. 
 
 stfii, Inf. livat, Part, lav, (see § 65) to go. 
 
 slitov, I spoke, I said, Ear. Jlor.from sua (ohs.). 
 
 slgi^isvos, ?/, ov, Pass. Pai*t. of gia>. 
 
 slgrjvji, ris, ?], peace. 
 
 sis, iiia, sv, one. 
 
 siosXavvco, slasXd^co, SLtisXrftaxa, (ikavvoo) to 
 drive into, to ride or march into. 
 
 si<jsg%o[xou, ilsvaofxai, iXij?,vda, Ear. Aor. slaijk- 
 Gov, to come into. 
 
 sxaoios, ?i, ov, each, every one. 
 
 sxarov, a hundred. 
 
 ixdsiga, sgco, ixdidagxa, (digco) to flay, to skin. 
 
 sxslvos, y\, o, he, that person. 
 
 ixxXyoia, as, r), (xaksco, to call) a popular as- 
 sembly. 
 
 13* 
 
158 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ixnXico, svgco, nkn'ksvxa, (ix, tcXsco) to sail out, 
 
 to sail away. 
 sxTtoisoo, co, ijoco, 7is7ioi7jxci, to complete, to make, 
 
 to deliver. 
 ixros, outside, without. 
 sxcov, ovaa, 6v, willing, voluntary. 
 iXdrrav, ovos, 6, ?), less, smaller. 
 iXavvoo, iXdoco, Att. iXco, iXijXaxa, iXijXaficu, r\Xd- 
 
 di\v, to drive ; elliptically, to advance, to march. 
 iXdyiaros, r\, ov, Sup. of i karroo v, least, smallest. 
 iXssco, co, ijoco, (JXsos, pity) to pity, to compas- 
 sionate. 
 eXsn^xoavvij, ijs, tj, pity, alms. 
 iXsvdegog, a, cv, free. 
 
 c EXixcov, oovos, 6, Helicon, a mountain in Bozotia. 
 c EXXds, ddog, 77, Greece. 
 a EXXr ( v, ijvog, 6, a Grecian. 
 Q EXXi\6novrog, ov, 6, the Hellespont. 
 sXXimjg, sos, 6, ?/, (XeL7tco, to leave) deficient. 
 IXniXco, loco, jjXmxa, to hope, to expect. 
 ikinis, tdos, y, hope, expectation. 
 iufidXXoo, fiaXoi, fiifihjxa, Aor. ivifiaXov, (/3aA- 
 
 Xoo) to throw or cast in ; clUpticalhj, to empty 
 
 or discharge itself, as a river, 
 ififxsvco, svoo, i^f.isidvijxa, ((asvcd) to remain in, 
 
 to endure, to continue. 
 ifxog, ?/, 6v, my, mine. 
 ip7Zi7tzoo, Tteaovfiai, ip.7tS7trooxa f Aor. wires Gov, 
 
 (jtlnrco) (o fall in or among. 
 ifutXijOco, i\gco, {nXi\dco) to be full, to be satisfied. 
 
VOCABULARY. 159 
 
 ifKpsgco, ivoitico, ((piga) to bring in. 
 
 ivdsopai, ivdsiodou, to want, to need, with Gen. 
 
 ivdva, 8vaa, ivSidvxa, to enter in, to put on ; 
 
 Mid. evdvoiiai, to put upon one's self. 
 i'vsxa, on account of, with Gen. 
 ivvka, nine. 
 ivxavda, here. 
 
 ivzoXrf, ijs, -q, (ivzilXco, to command) a com- 
 mand, a charge. 
 igcugsa, «, foco, qxa, Aor. l|aAov, (algeco) to 
 
 take out, to take away forcibly ; Mid. i§ai~ 
 
 govfiai, to select, to take out. 
 E^aXucpco, ipa, Per/. Pass. i^aXyjlifx^ai, to wipe 
 
 out, to efface, to obliterate (aksccpco). 
 il;sgxouai, i^slsvoofxai, it-shjXvda, Jlor. i^rjhdov, 
 
 {egxo^ai) to come out. 
 l|£Tct£b, doco, to examine, to try. 
 ETtcuvECQ, 6, toco, (aivos) to praise. 
 3 E7tafuv6)v8as, ov, 6, Epaminondas. 
 east, since, when, after. 
 
 inetSdv, (iitsidrj and av) with Subj. when, after. 
 ijieidrf, since, after, when. 
 
 STteira, (sTti, sfca) then, afterwards, Lat. deinde. 
 imygdipco, xpco, yeygafa, (ygdcpco) to write upon, 
 
 to inscribe. 
 inidvyiia, ag, ?/, (Qvpos) desire. 
 iuLxgaTico, 6 } tjGco, xsxgdnjxa, (xgaros, force) 
 
 to conquer, to overcome. 
 imfiilsia, as, ?), (Jill, ^ieXbl, curae est) care. 
 BTtia^ao?, 6, ??, (arjfia) distinguished. 
 
160 VOCABULARY. 
 
 i7ii(jxoT8co, co, ijoco, (oxotos, darkness) to darken, 
 
 to obscure. 
 InLOTCLiiai, Imp, Part. lniOTap\v, Fut. ItxiottiOo- 
 
 liui, to know. 
 sTtLOTij^, ijs, i\, (iftidxapcu) application, study, 
 
 knowledge. 
 ijtLOTohj, ijs, ij, (Itcl, oriXlco, to send) an epistle. 
 inin^dsvco, svoco, to be employed with, to pur- 
 sue, to practise. 
 inicpEQCd, oloco, ivi']vo%a, evi)vsyLiai, Aor. Act. 
 
 ijvsyxa, (<psgco) to bring to, to bring upon, or 
 
 against ; Mid. i7Ucpigo{.icu, to bear one's self 
 
 upon, to rush upon. 
 ima, seven. 
 igyd^ofiai, doopuu, si'gyaOiiou, (egyov, a work) to 
 
 work, to labor, to perform. 
 igyaola, as, ?), a working, labor, an occupation. 
 egydxijs, ov, 6, a laborer, a workman, a performer. 
 egyov, ov, to, a work, labor, deed, business. 
 igsco, co, (see geco) to say. 
 egi'Cco, loco, (egis, strife) to strive, to contend. 
 c JEgfJLrjs, ov, 6, Mercury. 
 igv^vos, ?/, ov, fortified. 
 lg%oiiai, ilsvooLiai, ihjlvOa, Aor. i\kQov, to 
 
 come. 
 igcoicico, co, ijoco, TjgcoTijxa, to interrogate, to ask. 
 is for els, into, to. 
 ioOijs, ijxos, i], (ioQzco, to clothe, from svvvlil, to 
 
 put on) clothing. 
 IoOlco (tdco), Fut. sSollcu, idijdoxa, iSrjdsOfiai, 
 
 ridioO^v, to eat. 
 
VOCABULARY. 161 
 
 bote and itfr' civ, until. 
 
 Ejsgos, a, ov, the other of two. 
 
 hi, still, even now, further. 
 
 hoLfiog, t\, ov, ready, prepared. 
 
 ev, well. 
 
 EvyivEia, as, ?), (fv, yevos) high birth, nobility. 
 
 svyEVTJs, eos, 6, 7), well-born, noble. 
 
 svdoupovecQ, co, ijaco, (wdaipav) to be happy. 
 
 svdaifiovta, as, ?/, happiness, prosperity. 
 
 ev8aifji(ov 9 ovos, 6, tj, (ev, daiptav) happy, pros- 
 perous. 
 
 svEgysjeco, S, r\oco, (ev, Egyov) to benefit, to do 
 good to. 
 
 svxlEta, as, 7), (xkios) renown, glory. 
 
 J2vx?>£i8}]9, ov, 6, Euclid. 
 
 evXapEOfiai, ovfiai, jjoofiai, to beware of, to 
 shun, to be on one's guard. 
 
 evvov/os, ov, 6, (evvrj, E/coi) a eunuch. 
 
 Evginlhjs, ov, 6, Euripides. 
 
 evgioxo, Evgrjaco, Evgrixa, Jlor. Efigov, to find ; to 
 invent. 
 
 Evgvs, Eta, v, wide, broad. 
 
 EvaE^Eta, as, 7), (EvaE^r\s) piety. 
 
 evce^ijs, eos, 6, 7), (ev, oe[3g)) pious. 
 
 EVTV%E6T£gOS, Comp. of £VTV^7(S. 
 
 £vtv%ecj, S, riaco, (ev, Tv%rj) to be fortunate. 
 Evzvxtfg, eos, 6, i), fortunate, prosperous. 
 svrv%ta, as, 7), good fortune, prosperity. 
 £v%o{xai, evfjopai, Evypai, to pray, to supplicate, 
 to desire. 
 
162 VOCABULARY. 
 
 avcpogog, 6, ij, (sv, cpsga) fruitful. 
 
 ayyfiog, ov, 6, a grown young man. 
 
 icpLCTijLu, EiziGTifoa, icpiaiqxa, to place on or by ; 
 
 i7i£(jT7}v, I stood near. 
 i%dgog, a, oV, hostile ; i^dgog, ov, 6, an enemy. 
 €%co, f|o or a%ii<ja, so%i]xa, JLor. £<y%ov, to have. 
 sag, until. 
 
 Z. 
 
 tdco, 6, Cdfec), Sijaofiai, etyxa, rare) to live ; ol 
 
 tavrsg, the living. 
 £svyvv[ju 9 £W|«, E&v%a 9 (Zevya, obs.) to yoke, to 
 
 harness, to join. 
 Zsvg, Jiog and Zr\v6g, Jupiter. 
 typta, as, ?), loss, punishment. 
 Zijvcov, avog, 6, Zeno. 
 Syria, 6, jjacD, iZrjiyxa, to seek. 
 fyfajcag, sag, ?j, seeking, search, asking. 
 Zmj, qg, ?), (fao, to live) life. 
 £6ov, ov, to, a living creature, an animal. 
 
 ijyspav, 6vog, 6, a leader, a conductor, a guide. 
 
 ijyeopaL, ovficu, jjaofiai, ijyij^aL, («!/») to lead, 
 conduct, guide ; to think. 
 
 ij8£iv, (from oida) I knew. 
 
 Tjdecdg, with pleasure, willingly. 
 
 ijhj, at this moment, at once, immediately, al- 
 ready ; moreover, even. 
 
 r/dovij, ijg, q, pleasure. 
 
VOCABULARY. 163 
 
 rjSvs, sta, if, sweet, pleasant. 
 {jxiGTa, least, in the least degree. 
 tjxco, ?/Ja, to come ; Pres. I am come. 
 rjkidtos, a, or, stupid, foolish. 
 rifaxiaTrjs, ov, 6, one of the same age, a con- 
 temporary, a mate. 
 r)Mxos, q, ov, what sort of, how large. 
 fjfaos, ov, 6, the sun. 
 yjixega, as, tj, a day. 
 a Hga, as, r\, Juno. 
 c HgaxXirjs, iovs, 6, Hercules. 
 tJttcov, ovos, 6, i), less, inferior; JYeut. tjttov. 
 c 'H(pai6Tos, ov, 6, Vulcan. 
 r)%G), 60s ovs, i\, echo. 
 
 0. 
 
 ddXaaaa, y\s, r}, the sea. 
 
 Sdvaios, ov, b, (dvyjaxo) death* 
 
 ddiiTco, \pa, Tsdapfiai, to bury. 
 
 OavfAactTos, rj, ov, (Oavpa, a wonder) wonderful,, 
 admirable. 
 
 Qiajxa, aros, to, (fecco^cu, to survey) a specta- 
 cle, a sight, 
 
 detos, a, ov, divine. 
 
 OsXa, rjtfco, Aor. 7]QkXri6a, to will, to wish, to 
 choose. 
 
 6 sos, ov, 6, a god. 
 
 OsQUfpos, ov, 6, {Qsgt'Cco, to reap) a harvest 
 
 drigevco, aa, (dyjga, a hunt) to hunt, to pursue. 
 
 Oiigiov, ov, to, (Orjg) a wild beast. 
 
164 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Onaavgos, ov, 6, a treasure. 
 
 Bqaevs, ems, o, Theseus. 
 
 Ovijoxcj, Oavov(.icu, jiOvjjxa, Jlor. sdavov, to die. 
 
 Ovijtos, ij, ov, mortal. 
 
 06gv(3os, ov, 6, a tumult, disturbance. 
 
 dvydxiig, egos, ?), a daughter. 
 
 dv^a, oltos, to, incense, an offering, a sacrifice. 
 
 Ovfios, ov, 6, passion, anger ; desire. 
 
 Ovga, as, i\, a door. 
 
 /. 
 
 i'Sios, a, ov, one's own, peculiar, private. 
 
 hgov, ov, to, (JYeat. of lego?) any thing conse- 
 crated ; a temple. 
 
 txavos, ij, ov, adequate, sufficient, fit, consid- 
 erable. 
 
 iva, in order that. 
 
 Ivayos, ov, 6, Inachus. 
 
 los, ov, 6, poison. 
 
 iTtTios, ov, 6, a horse. 
 
 3 Iaoxgdnis, sos, 6, Isocrates. 
 
 °IagarjX, (indeclinable) Israel. 
 
 I'dnifu, OTjjocD, to place ; saTiida, I placed ; Ear. 
 Jlor. Eouiv, I stood ; Perf. eOTiixa, I stand ; 
 Mid. LGzafiai, to place one's self, to stand. 
 
 ic%vgos, d, ov, (i6%vs) strong. 
 
 i6/vq(5s, powerfully, strenuously, severely. 
 
 l<jyvs, vos, ii, strength. 
 
 'Izakixos, i\, ov, Italian. 
 
 i%Ovs, vos, 6, a fish. 
 
VOCABULARY. 165 
 
 K. 
 
 KaSpos, ov, 6, Cadmus. 
 
 xaOffficu, Imp. Past ixadjfarjv, (t^wcu) to sit. 
 
 xadi'Cdvco, (xaQi'Cco, i£&, ados, a seat) to sit. 
 
 xai, and, also ; even. 
 
 xuigos, ov, 6, a season. 
 
 xatco, xavoco, Jlor. hxavaa, lxr\a, to kindle, to 
 
 set on fire ; Mid. xauadai, to burn. 
 xaxta, as, ij, vice, evil, cowardice. 
 xaxoloyia, as, y\, (xaxov, Xsya) evil speaking, 
 
 slander. 
 xaxov, ov, to, an evil, evil. 
 xaxos, ij, ov, evil, vicious, wicked, cowardly ; 
 
 Comp. xaxicov, Sup. xdxiaxos. 
 xaxcos, badly, illy, evilly. 
 xaXico, S, eaco, xkxliyxa, xixXr^iai, to call. 
 xaXos, i\, ov, beautiful, noble, honorable ; Comp. 
 
 xaXXicov, Sup. xaXXidios. 
 xaloxayaQla, as, i\, nobleness, virtue, upright- 
 ness. 
 xalcos, beautifully, well, honorably. 
 xd^ivo, xafAco, xixfx^xa, Jlor. exafiov, to labor, to 
 
 be in distress. 
 xdv^ for xai dv, even if. 
 xagSia, as, 7j, a heart, 
 xagitos, ov, b, fruit. 
 xaxaftaivtd, ftjjcioftai, fiefirjxa) xazifiTfv, (ftaivco) 
 
 to go down, to descend. 
 xajaxXivo, tvS, (xXiva) to bend down, to recline. 
 14 
 
166 VOCABULARY. 
 
 xaia}.Si7to, ipco, xazaksksKpa, (xard, Xsiitco) to 
 
 leave behind, to forsake. 
 xaTa7ioX£[AscQ, a, ijaco, (noks^sco) to subdue in war. 
 xaraTlOiftM, xaradrfdco, ridscxa, (rid^fii) to lay 
 
 down, to deposite. 
 xaracpgovsco, a, ?fcco, ((pgoveco) to contemn, to 
 
 despise. 
 xaTayvyyj, fjs, ?), (xarafpsvyw, to flee for refuge) 
 
 a refuge. 
 xaTELSa, (xard, si'Sa) to look down, to survey, 
 
 to behold. 
 Tcaiy/ogecd, S, tjaco, xax-qyog^xa, (dyogtvco) to 
 
 accuse. 
 xandcov, Ear. Aor. Part, from xaxeldco. 
 xdromgov, ov, to, a mirror. 
 xsiprffaov, ov, to, (xalpou, to lie) a burden. 
 KsXatvai, 6v, at, Celaenae. 
 xsXevcQ) svaco, xexiXsvxa, to command. 
 xegas, aros, to, a horn. 
 xsgdos, eos, to', gain. 
 xscpaXri, ijs, ?/, a head. 
 xijgv£, vxos, 6, a herald. 
 Kidougav, covos, 6, Cithaeron. 
 xtvdvvos, ov, 6, danger. 
 KXiag%os, ot/, 6, Ciearchus. 
 xlzivos, ij, oV, (xlsos, renown) renowned, cele- 
 brated. 
 xkeos, ovs, to, renown, glory. 
 xksTtirjs, ov, 6, (xXsjtTco) a thief. 
 xXo7trf, ijs, i\, theft. 
 
VOCABULARY. 167 
 
 xoivos, rj; ov, common. 
 
 xocvavico, 6, tftico, xexoivavTixa, to partake, to 
 share in. 
 
 xoXd'Co, acta, xsxoXaxa, to chastise, to correct, 
 to punish. 
 
 xoXaxeta, a9, 7), flattery. 
 
 x6Xa%, axog, 6, a flatterer. 
 
 xo^iti, 7)9, 7j, hair. 
 
 x6ga£, axos, 6, a raven, a crow. 
 
 xogrf, 779, t), a maiden. 
 
 xoa^ico, 6, TJcfco, x£XQG{Ly)xa, to arrange, to adorn. 
 
 xodfxos, ov, 6, order, harmony, ornament ; the 
 orderly system of things, the world. 
 
 xgaTsco, a, 7Jaco, xsxgdzTixa, (xgdios) to rule, to 
 command, to overcome. 
 
 xgdios, eog, to, power, force, strength. 
 
 xgeixxcov, superior, stronger, better ; Sup. xgd- 
 tiotos, strongest, best. 
 
 xgspdvvvfit, xgsfidtia, (xgepdco) to suspend, to 
 hang up. 
 
 xgidL9, sag, 7), (xglvco, to judge) the act of judg- 
 ing, judgment, a decision, a sentence. 
 
 Kgircov, covos, 6, Crito. 
 
 xgoxodsikog, ov, 6, a crocodile. 
 
 Kgovog, ov, 6, Saturn. 
 
 xgvujco, yjco, Perf. Pass, xixgvfifiac, ixgycpd-qv, 
 Jlor. sxgvfiov, to hide. 
 
 xidofiou, Sfiat, xiTJaopcu, to acquire ; Perf. xk- 
 xrr][Aai, I possess. 
 
 xTTJpa, aro9, to, (xvdo[j,ou, to acquire) a posses- 
 sion. 
 
168 VOCABULARY. 
 
 xjrjctis, sco9, 7), the act of possessing, possession. 
 
 Hilarys, ov, 6, (xtl^o) a builder, a founder. 
 
 xv/.t%, 1x09, 71, a cup. 
 
 xvfia, azos, to, a wave. 
 
 xvqios, ov, 6, a lord, a master. 
 
 Kvgo9, ov, 6, Cyrus. 
 
 xvcov, xvvos, 6, 71, a dog. 
 
 y.apii, 719, 1), a village. 
 
 y.cocpo9, ?], oV, deaf, dumb. 
 
 A. 
 
 yiax£daif.iovco9, ov, a Lacedemonian. 
 
 XaXeo), a, 7] a co, to talk, to speak. 
 
 kd?.09, ov, 6, 71, talkative, loquacious. 
 
 lapfidvco, fa'iyjoficu, uhiya, dXii^ai, ifajcpOiiv, 
 Aor. Act. ekafiov, to take, to receive. 
 
 ?.a(.i7td9, ddo9, ij, a torch. 
 
 },afi7igo9, d, ov, (Xd^7tco > to shine) splendid, bril- 
 liant. 
 
 kavddvco, fajtfa, Xihida, Xihi&fiai, (root kddco, 
 hjdco) to be concealed, to escape notice ; Xav- 
 Odvco ds tovto noiav, I escape your notice do- 
 ing this, i. e. I do this without your knowledge. 
 
 )Jouva, 119, 7), a lioness. 
 
 Xeyco, Xt%co, Per/. Pass. Xsleypcu, iks%0iiv, to 
 speak, to say. 
 
 Xufia, rpco, to pour, to distil ; Mid. ksifiopm, to 
 flow, to trickle. 
 
 Xbltzo, yjco, XiXouta, Lett. Per/. XiXeicpa, to leave. 
 
 Atovalo9, a, ov, Lerna^an. 
 
VOCABULARY. 169 
 
 Xsvxos, ty oV, white. 
 
 Xecov, ovtos, 6, a lion. 
 
 Xrfya, |«, to stop, to cease. 
 
 krfOrj, ?/s, fy forgetfulness. Arfiyi, Lethe, the 
 river of oblivion in Hades. 
 
 XiOos, ov, 6, a stone. 
 
 Xiftrfv, svos, 6, a harbour. 
 
 Aivos, ov, Linus. 
 
 koyi&fiou, [(jofxai, (loyos) to reckon, to esti- 
 mate, to consider. 
 
 Xoyos, of, 6, (Xeya) speech, reason, an account. 
 
 Xoutos tf, oV, (X£L7tco, to leave) what is left, rest, 
 remaining ; rd lontd, the remaining things, the 
 rest; tov Xoltzov (sc. %qovqv), for the future. 
 
 Xovco, Xovdco, Perf. Pass. XiXov^iai, to wash (par- 
 ticularly the body ; to wash the hands, vinT®* 
 to wash clothes, itkvvto) ; Mid. Xovopai or 
 Xov^iai, to wash one's self. 
 
 A0990S, ov, 6, a summit, a hill. 
 
 Avxcos, ov, 6, Lycius. 
 
 Xvxog, ov, 6, a wolf. 
 
 Avxovgyos, ov, 6, Lycurgus. 
 
 XvitEG), i\(jco, XsXvjzifsta, {IvTtij), to grieve, to af- 
 flict; Mid. Xv7tetadai, to grieve, to be dis- 
 tressed. 
 
 Xv7Z7], 77s, ?}, grief, pain. 
 
 Xv%vos, ov, 6, a lamp. 
 
 M. 
 
 [id£a, ??s, f(, barley bread, a cake. 
 14* 
 
170 VOCABULARY. 
 
 [idOii^a, aros, to, (fiavOdvco, to learn) any thing- 
 learned, knowledge, learning. 
 
 ^dQi\ois, ecos, i\, the act of learning, learning, 
 instruction. 
 
 fiaOrjTijs, ov, 6, a learner, a scholar. 
 
 Mala, as, r\, Maia. 
 
 Malavdgos, ov, 6, Maeander, a river in Asia Minor, 
 
 [la'cvco, pava, ps^iiva, to madden; Mid. [xatvo- 
 fiat, to be phrensied, to rave. 
 
 pdxag, agog, 6, r), happy, blest, 
 
 liaxdgios, a, ov, happy. 
 
 Max&dovia, as, r), Macedonia. 
 
 [tangos, d, ov, long. 
 
 (.idXa, very much ; pdkXov, more. 
 
 fxdXtara, most, especially, in the highest degree. 
 
 3Iavddvii, lis, ij, Mandane. 
 
 fxavddvco, {.laOrJGopai, [xepddiixa, Aor. spadov, to 
 learn, to understand. 
 
 pavia, a?, rj, madness. 
 
 Mavzivua, as, ii, Mantinea. 
 
 Magdvas, ov, 6, Marsyas. 
 
 padziyoco, chjcq, (fxdciTij;, a whip) to whip, scourge. 
 
 pd%n, ijs, i}, a fight, a battle. 
 
 [id%o[iai, [.ia%soo{jiai and [ia%ovfiai, [tsf.id%r}{iai, 
 to fight. 
 
 pkyas, {.isydhi, fisya, great; Comp. (.isiZav, great- 
 er ; >S'/^. [dyiGios, greatest. 
 
 \ikya, JYeut. used adverbially, greatly. 
 
 (jLtyzQos, eog, to, greatness. 
 
 fxi0)i, lis, i), drunkenness. 
 
VOCABULARY. 171 
 
 pslZcov, ovos, 6, tj, greater. See {iiy as. 
 
 [Asigdxiov, ov, to, a young man, a boy. 
 
 [xiXas, aiva piXav, black. 
 
 ps Xiir], rjs, r/, (^sXsjdco, to exercise) a practis- 
 ing, training, care. 
 
 pi fa, ixos, to, honey. 
 
 [lifaaaa and (lifaxra, qs, tj, a bee. 
 
 [xsXXa, ixslXjjaco, to be about to do, to delay ; to 
 {liXXov, id [liXXovia, that which is about to 
 be, the future. 
 
 fxificpofiat, fjL£[A,ipo[A6u, to blame, to censure. 
 
 (xiv, a particle corresponding to our indeed, to 
 be sure, in constructions like the following ; 
 xanjyogsl fisv iftov, xgcvsi di tovtov, he ac- 
 cuses indeed me, but places this man on tri- 
 al ; dyados fxiv, 8vciTv%qs di, good to be sure, 
 but unfortunate. // is generally used with di, 
 and indicates a contrast frequently too slight 
 to be expressed in English. 
 
 (lived, [isvco, [Aspivrjxa, to remain. 
 
 [lidos, rj, ov, middle in the midst. 
 
 [ASTapdXkco, fiaXco, fiifiXiixa, (fidXXco) to change. 
 
 (isja^olrj, rjs, t\, change. 
 
 {i£Ta7ti[A7tco, vjco, (7tifX7tco) to send after ; more 
 common in the Mid. [ASTa7ti[t7TO[Aai, to send for. 
 
 [1st ax idy pi, Orjoco, jidsixa, (ridrffxi) to remove, 
 to transfer, to change ; Mid. [xsTaTiOsfAai, to 
 change one's self. 
 
 (tinges and [is%Qi, until. 
 
 firj, not, lest ; used like the Latin ne, not for an 
 
172 VOCABULARY. 
 
 absolute negative (for which ov is employed), 
 
 but conditionally; hence used in prohibitions 
 
 and dependent propositions ; pi} hiye, [tij Xe^jfs, 
 
 do not speak. 
 fxtfSi, (pj, 8e) neither, not even ; differs from 
 
 ovds as [Aij differs from ov. 
 (j.7]dsis, fivdsfxia, ^8iv, no one ; it differs from 
 
 ovdslg as pij from ov. 
 [indi7ioT£, (f.O(d£, tzotb) never. 
 31rjSog, ov, a Mede. 
 f.ujv 9 in truth, assuredly, moreover. 
 jMJTs, (fjtij, ts) both not, neither. 
 f-irjz^g, igog, ij, a mother. 
 lLiyvvp.1, [iit-a, ^dixiy^iat, to mingle. 
 fjiixgos, d, ov, little, small. 
 Mil.Tid&\g, ov, 6, Miltiades. 
 fxifn^Ti^g, ov, 6, ([upiopou, to imitate) an imitator. 
 pifAvijuxco, iA,v)j<ja, (uvdco) to remind ; Mid. [xi- 
 
 [jivijoicouaif [iv)'i<jO{iai, (.ispviffiai, to remember. 
 [.uodvdgcQTiog, ov, 6, i\, (fiioeco, to hate, dvdgconog) 
 
 a misanthrope. 
 [alcecj, 6, tjaco, fis^uoijxa, to hate. 
 fxiadog, ov, 6, wages, a reward. 
 {iicoloyog, ov, 6, ij, a hater of knowledge, a 
 
 skeptic. 
 (xvrjfia, azog, to, ((.ivdco) a memorial, a monument. 
 MvYi^oovvrj, i}g, 7], Mnemosyne, the mother of 
 
 the muses ; memory. 
 fiohs, scarcely, with difficulty. 
 (x6vi(.wg, ov, 6, ?/, (fxhco) abiding, permanent. 
 
VOCABULARY. 173 
 
 povos, ?]-, ov, alone, sole. 
 
 ixovaa, ??s, ij, a muse. 
 
 [ivQog, ov, 6, a speech, discourse, fiction, fable a 
 
 Mvaos, ov, 6, a Mysian. 
 
 (.icogia, as, ij, stupidity, folly. 
 
 N. 
 vai, yes, certainly. 
 Nd$-os, ov, 6, Naxos. 
 vaog, ov, 6, a temple. 
 vavn^g, ov, 6, (vavg) a sailor. 
 veaviag, ov, 6, a youth. 
 Netlog, ov, 6, the Nile. 
 vexgog, ov, 6, the dead. 
 veog, a, oj/, young, new ; ol vkoi, the youths. 
 vecpifa], jjg, ??, a cloud. 
 vfas, «, 6, a temple. 
 vrjaog, ov, 6, an island. 
 vixdco, co, ipa, vtvlxyjxa, to conquer. 
 v^, 77s, ?), conquest, a victory. 
 vo{ii£co, lacD, (vofios, law) to establish by law ; 
 
 to think, to believe. 
 voftog, ov, 6, a law. 
 
 voog vovg, voov vov, 6, understanding, mind. 
 vodog, ov, 6, disease. 
 vvv, now. 
 vv|, vvxroff, ?], night. 
 
 Bsviag, ov, 6, Xenias. 
 Sevoxgajri^ ovg, 6, Xenocrates. 
 
174 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Savocpcov, covtos, 6, Xenophon. 
 Seg^ijs, ov, 6, Xerxes. 
 |f(7Tog, ij, ov, (|aa) polished. 
 %icpos, sos, to, a sword. 
 %v[Al3ovl>ia, as, ??, counsel, advice. 
 
 O. 
 
 6, ?/, to, the ; 6 ^iv, the one ; 6 £i, the other. 
 ode, ijds, i68s, this, this here ; ijde ij dxrij laxiv, 
 
 here is the shore. 
 bdos, ov, ?^, a way, a road. 
 odovs, oVtos, 6, a tooth. 
 §0£v, from whence. 
 otda, I know, ^ftj/, I knew ; Subj. etdco, Opt. el- 
 
 Setyv, Imp. i'odi, Inf. slSsvai, Part, eldas. This 
 
 verb is the Ear. Per/, of si'da, to see. 
 olxhys, of, 6, (olxos) a domestic, a servant, a 
 
 slave. 
 oixico, 6, 7}ci(d, axijxa, to dwell, to inhabit. 
 olxifacog, ogos, 6, an inhabitant. 
 olxia, as, ?/, a house. 
 olvos, ov, 6, wine. 
 oiofxat contr. oifiat, olijdopai, cojjdrjv, to think, 
 
 to suppose. 
 otdco, Fat. of cpsgco. 
 oTos, a, oi/, qualis, correlative of tolos, of what 
 
 kind, of what sort. 
 6xr6, eight. 
 
 oXlyos, t\, ov, little ; oliyoi, at, a, few. 
 oXhvfxi, 6X6, oXaXsxa, to destroy ; Mid. bXXvjiai, 
 
VOCABULARY. 175 
 
 Jlor. aXo^y, to perish ; Ear. Perf. oXcoXa, I 
 
 am undone. 
 bXog, r\, ov, whole, entire. 
 "OfiTjgos, ov, 6, Homer. 
 
 d[u2.ico, gS, rfcta, co^ih^xa, (ofiihog) to be in com- 
 pany with, to associate with. 
 iififxa, arog, to, (onropcu) a sight, the eye. 
 ofxoiog, ot, oi>, similar. 
 opoicos, similarly. 
 
 ovsiSl'Cg), loco, (bvstdog) to reproach. 
 bvsiSog, sog, to', reproach. 
 bvo[ia, arog, to', a name. 
 ofi/'s, eta, v, sharp. 
 Qity\, where, how, in what manner. 
 otzXov, ov, to', a Vv r eapon. 
 bncog, (6g) in what manner, how ; that, in order 
 
 that. 
 bgdco, a, Fut. bxpoiiai, Perf. icbgaxa, Ear. Jlor. 
 
 eidov, to see. 
 oQyij, rjg, q, (bgeyco) mental impulse, passion, 
 
 anger. 
 bgyi£o[iou, to be angry. 
 ogsya, t-a, chge%a, to stretch, to extend ; Mid. 
 
 ogtyopou, (to stretch one's self) to strive after, 
 
 to aim at. 
 ogdog, tf, oV, erect, upright, straight ; right. 
 bgog, £os, to, a mountain. 
 &, rj, o, who, which, what ; o$ av, whoever ; iv to 
 
 (%govcp), while. 
 balcog, (baiog) piously. 
 
176 VOCABULARY. 
 
 odfxrf, r\s, r/, (o£co, to smell) a smell, an odor. 
 
 oaos, ij, ov, correlative of togos, as much as, as 
 great as ; oaot, as many as. 
 
 odTis, iJtls, 8,-11, whoever, whatever, who, what. 
 
 oxav, (ots, civ), when, with Subj. 
 
 ots, when ; sod' ots, there is when, sometimes. 
 
 oti, that, because. 
 
 ov, ovx, ov%, not. 
 
 oi>, ot, I', (from i) of him, of himself. 
 
 ov, where. 
 
 ov8sis, ovdsfiia, ovdsv, (ov8s, sis) no one. 
 
 ov8sjcots, (ov8s, tzote) never. 
 
 ovxsti, (ovx, stl) no longer. 
 
 ovv, {used in connecting a conclusion icith the 
 preceding reasoning) then, therefore. 
 
 ovTioTs, (ov, uots) never. 
 
 Ovgavia, as, ii, Urania. 
 
 ovgavos, ov, 6, heaven. 
 
 ovs, coios, to, an ear. 
 
 ovts, (ov, te) neither. 
 
 ovtoi, certainly not. 
 
 ovtos, avTii, tovto, this. See § 24. 
 
 ovtcos and ovtco, thus. 
 
 bcpis, scos, 6, a serpent. 
 
 tiyjov, ov, to, (zvjcd, to boil) originally boiled 
 food, flesh, what was eaten with bread ; sub- 
 sequently, what was used as seasoning, sauce ; 
 as, novos oxpov cots dyadois, labor seasons, 
 gives a relish to, our enjoyments. 
 
VOCABULARY. 177 
 
 27. 
 
 rtdOos, eos ovs, to, (jtddxo) a passion, an affection. 
 
 Ttaideia, as, i\, (7rarg) education, discipline, train- 
 ing, instruction, science. 
 
 itais, naiSos, 6, r), a child, a boy, a girl, a slave. 
 
 ndXai, anciently, formerly. 
 
 Udvdsia, as, y, Panthea. 
 
 TCavoitxrjs, ov, 6, {ndv, ontofiai) all- seeing. 
 
 7iavra%6d€v, from every quarter. 
 
 7tavTa%ov, everywhere. 
 
 TtavToios, a, ov, (reds) of all sorts, manifold. 
 
 ndrntos, ov, 6, (udmtas) a grandfather. 
 
 naqayiyvo[iai, yevrjao^iai, yeyivrjftai, {yiyvopai) 
 to be present, to come to. 
 
 7tagddsi/[ia, azos, to, (TragadeLZWfxc) a pattern, 
 a model, an example. 
 
 nagadeicfos, ov, 6, a pleasure-garden, a park in 
 which wild animals are kept. 
 
 naqakan^dva, Xtfyjopai, a'A^cc, (Xapfidvco) to 
 take to one's self, to receive what is handed 
 down. 
 
 nagaaxsva^co, daco, (dxsvd^o, oxsvos) to prepare, 
 to provide, furnish. 
 
 ttagud, ccg, r/, a cheek. 
 
 Ttdgsi[u, eoopai, (jtagd, eifii, to be) to be pres- 
 ent ; ol nagovrss, those present. 
 
 ndgsifxt, (jtagd, sfyi, to go) to come to, to 
 come forward, to pass by. 
 
 7tagig%o[iai, eXtvao^iai, nagskTJXvda, (i'o^o^cu) 
 15 
 
178 VOCABULARY. 
 
 to come to, to pass by or beyond ; JLor. na- 
 grjXOov. 
 
 Tzagsxa, st-co, rtageGpixa, to hold near, to pre- 
 sent, to furnish. 
 
 Tiagtaij^iL, aujctco, rtageGziixa, (iVi^t) to place 
 near, by, or with ; Aor. Ttagidxiiv, I stood near, 
 by the side of; rtagsGiTixa, 1 stand near, by. 
 
 Uagvaaaos, ov, 6, Parnassus. 
 
 rzds, Tiaaa, ndv, all, every. 
 
 Uaoicov, covos, 6, Pasion. 
 
 7taTi\g, egos, 6, a father. 
 
 TiaTgis, tdos, t), native land, country. 
 
 jtavco, Geo, neitavxa, to cause to cease, to cause 
 to stop ; Mid. navo^ai, to stop, to cease. 
 
 nuda, oco, TTBTtsixa, to persuade; 7ti7toida, to 
 trust ; Mid. netdo^ai, to confide in, to yield 
 to, to obey. 
 
 Iletdco, 60s ovs, ?/, Peitho, the goddess of per- 
 suasion ; persuasion. 
 
 ji£igdcd,.co, daco, nsTtsigaxa, (icstga) to try, to put 
 to the proof; Mid. rcsigdofxat, cofxai, to en- 
 deavour, to attempt, to try. 
 
 Ileioidai, cov, 01, Pisiclians. 
 
 jie^ltcco^ yjco, 7t£7toficpa, to send, to conduct. 
 
 Ttevia, as, i), (rcivco, jtovkco, to labor) poverty. 
 
 Ttevrs, five. 
 
 TzsTtlos, ov, 6, a robe, a garment. 
 
 Ttegiig%o[Aai, ikevdofiou, ifajkvda, (sg^ofxcu) to 
 go round, to surround. 
 
 uhgiy,aTai)[)i\yvv^a, ggjjt-a (nsgi, xard, giiyvv^a) 
 to tear in pieces all around. 
 
VOCABULARY. 179 
 
 TtBglXvitog, ov, 6, ??, (jtsgi, IvTtrj) excessively 
 grieved, deeply sorrowing. 
 
 7t£Qi7taT£co, 6, foe), (ji£gi, naxkco) to walk about. 
 
 7t£Qi%ag7J9, sog, (tzsqi, %aLQco) immoderately joyful. 
 
 IHgoijs, ov, 6, a Persian. 
 
 7ihga, a?, i\, a rock. 
 
 Utfyacfos, ov, b, the horse Pegasus (from 7fnyt], 
 a fountain, rniyaXco, as having caused a foun- 
 tain to spring on Mt. Helicon by a stroke of 
 his hoof). 
 
 ni\yri, ijg, r/, a fountain, a source. 
 
 nrfga, as, ?/, a travelling sack, a wallet. 
 
 7tij%vs, sag, 6, an elbow, an arm, a cubit. 
 
 mxgog, a, ov, sharp, bitter. 
 
 new, Ttio^ai, 71 in cox a, Aor. Imov, to drink. 
 
 TtiTtico, nsaovfiai, 7ZS7noxa, JLor. £U£Gov, to fall, 
 to befall, to happen. 
 
 itiaxevo, aa>, 7tS7ii6Tsvxa, (nuQco) to believe, to 
 trust. 
 
 itiazog, 7j, 6v, faithful, trustworthy. 
 
 UXdrcov, covog, 6, Plato. 
 
 nXuaiog, Sup. of 7toXvs, most. 
 
 nXijdog, so?, to, (7tXijdco) a multitude. 
 
 nXtfv, except, with Gen. 
 
 ttfajgrfg, £og, 6, ij, (jtXiog, nXico) full. 
 
 nXr^goco, 6, coaco, 7t£7ihjga)xa, to fill. 
 
 nXolov, ov, to, (7tl£co 9 to sail) a ship. 
 
 TtXovctiog, a, ov, rich. 
 
 nXoviico, 6, -qoco, UEixXovz^xa, to be rich. 
 
 nXovzog, ov, b, (jtXoETog, from itoXvg and hog, 
 an abundant year) wealth. 
 
130 VOCABULARY. 
 
 niovxcdv, covos, 6, Pluto, God of the infernal 
 
 regions. 
 nodco, rfctco, 7Z£7Touj7ca, to do, to make ; s v ttoulv, 
 
 to do well, to benefit ; Mid. tzolov[a,<u, to 
 
 make to one's self. 
 7tofy(ia, axog, xo, a thing made, a work, a poem. 
 Tiot^xrjg, ov, 6, a maker, a poet. 
 ixotog, a, ov, of what sort, what. 
 noifiijv, ivog, 6, a shepherd. 
 noXe^uog, a, ov, (noXs^iog) hostile ; ol itoXspiou 
 
 the enemy. 
 noXspixdg, if, ov, warlike. 
 7t6?.£fios, ov, 6, war. 
 
 Ttdfos, scos, 7j, (itolvg, many) a city, a state. 
 noXXdyag, often, many times. 
 itohjdvdgcoitog, ov, 6,iq, (jioXvg, avdgcmog) pop- 
 ulous. 
 TiokvfiadTJg, ios, 6, i\> {no'kvg, fxavddvco) learned. 
 tioXvs, noXh], nokv, much, many. 
 novvgog, d,6v, (tiovsco) bad, malignant, depraved. 
 novog, ov, 6, (jtivco) work, labor. 
 JJo(j£l8cov, avog, 6, Neptune, God of the sea. 
 noxa^og, ov, 6, a river. 
 710X8, when. 
 
 tzote, once, at some time,, at any time, ever. 
 tiovs, tzoSos, 6, a foot. 
 ngdy^ia, axog, xo, a thing done, a deed ; a thing, 
 
 an affair. 
 ngdaaco and ngdxxco, %co, nsngd^a, to act, to 
 
 manage, to be engaged in, to do; ev ngdx- 
 
 xeiv, to be prosperous.. 
 
VOCABULARY. 181 
 
 TtgsTtsi, (ngiitco) it is becoming, it is befitting. 
 ngiofivs, vos, and fos, Poet, for 7tg8dfivTiis, old, 
 
 an old man. 
 7tQ£6fivTEQos, a, ov, (Comp. of rtgiofivs) older, 
 
 an elder, and TigsofivTaros, ??, ov, Sup. oldest. 
 ngiv, before. 
 Ttgodyco, a|«, (ngo, ayco) to lead forward, to go 
 
 forward, to precede. 
 ngofiarov, ov, to, a sheep. 
 TigodidafM, Sacta, didioxa, Sidofxai, (diSco^u) to 
 
 give up, to betray. 
 TtgodoiTjg, ov, 6, a betrayer, a traitor. 
 ngoXeya, |ra, Perf Pass, ngoXslsypai, (liyco) 
 
 to speak before, to foretell. 
 7tgo<jsg%o[iou, iXsvcfofiaL, sXyXvOa, A or. ngoaijX- 
 
 Oov, to come to, to approach. 
 ngookafifidva, fojxpofiou, si'kyya, Aor* ngoaika- 
 
 fiov, (Xafifidvco) to take in addition, to take 
 
 to one's aid. 
 ngoisgos, a, ov, (Comp. from ngo) prior, earlier. 
 ngoyjJTfjg, ov, o, (ngo, (pqpi) a foreteller, a 
 
 prophet. 
 ngcoTos, 7j, ov, (Sup. of ngo) first ; to ngmov, at 
 
 first ; ngSrov, first, adverbially, 
 nj-qvos, ij, oV, (mffvai, nkxopai) winged. 
 HvOayogas, ov, Pythagoras. 
 nv"ky\, -qs, 7/, a gate. 
 nvvddvopac, 7tsv(jO[Aai, 7t67tva{Acu r to inquire, to 
 
 learn by inquiry ; Aor. invdo^v. 
 nvg, nvgos, to', fire. 
 
 15* 
 
182 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ticotiote, ever, at any time ; ov nconoxE,. not at 
 
 any time, never. 
 nm ; how? in what manner? 
 7ias enclitic, somehow ; cods ncos, somehow so. 
 
 gddtos, a, ov, Comp* gaSicov and gdcov, Sup. gc£8c- 
 
 otos and gacnos, easy; adv. gaov, more easily. 
 gdOvf-ios, ov, (Radios, 6vi.i6?) careless, slothful. 
 gico, gsi/Gopou, to flow ; Jlor. Pass, iggviiv, hence 
 
 Perf. Act. iggviixa. 
 gico, Etgiixa, Eigiifiou, to speak, to say ; Fut. igco, 
 
 from Etgco, Jlor. siTtov. 
 gijrcog, ogos, 6, (gsco) a speaker, an orator, a 
 
 rhetorician. 
 gi'Ca, vs, ij, a root. 
 gcopi, ns, i], {goco, g&vvvfit) bodily vigor, strength. 
 
 Udgbeis, ecov, at, Sardis. 
 
 aeavTov, rjs, of thyself, of thee. 
 
 othjvi], 119, ?), the moon. 
 
 on\iaivco, avco, JLor. ioifciriva, (ctrj{j.a, a sign) to 
 
 point out, to indicate. 
 ctydco, co, ijaco, osatyiixa, to be silent. 
 aiyij, rjs, rf, (aiydco) silence. 
 Zixslla, a?, ii, Sicily. 
 dtcoTtda, co, ijaco, ctsoicomixa, to be silent. 
 axiXog, eos, to, a leg. 
 6X71V1), ijs, ii, a tent. 
 
VOCABULARY. 183 
 
 GftipoG), do, acta, ioxTJvoxa, to pitch a tent, to 
 inhabit, to dwell. 
 
 &xid, ctg, i\, a shadow. 
 
 oocpia, as, i\, (ooyos) wisdom, skill in any art 
 or science. 
 
 ooyiGTrjs, ov, 6, (aocpos) a wise man, a sophist. 
 
 aocpos, rj, ov, wise, skilful, accomplished. 
 
 andco, 6, doco, to draw. 
 
 ortovdaLos, a, ov, (oTtovdrf, zeal) zealous, dili- 
 gent, good. 
 
 oxdois, ecos, i\, (oxdco, laxr^iL) a placing, a stand- 
 ing, a rising ; a party, faction, sedition. 
 
 oxavgos, ov, 6, (ioxt^jll, to place) a pale fixed 
 upright ; a stake, a cross. 
 
 ctxsvos, r\, ov, (oxivoo) narrow. 
 
 oxigyco, |«, eoxsg%a and saxogya, to love, prop- 
 erly with natural affection ; to be satisfied. 
 
 axod, as, i\, a porch, a gallery. 
 
 oxoXos, ov, 6, (oxeXXco) a sending, an armament, 
 an equipment. 
 
 oxofia, axos, to, a mouth. 
 
 axgaxsvpa, axos, xo, (oxgaxos) an army. 
 
 Gxgax-qyos, ov, 6, (ox g axos, ay a) a general, a 
 commander. 
 
 oxgaxiSxijs, ov, 6, a soldier. 
 
 ov, oov, thou. 
 
 ovyxakeco, co, itioo, ovyxixfyxa, (xaXieo) to call 
 together. 
 
 2Jv£weois, scos, 6, Syennesis. 
 
 avXka^dvo, krfyjopat, ovvsifajpa, ovvsXafiov 
 
184 VOCABULARY. 
 
 (laufidva) to take together with, to aid, to 
 
 seize upon. 
 dvlXeya, £co, avvziXo/a, avvsiksy^ai (avv, Xeycu) 
 
 to collect, to bring together. 
 avpfiaivco, firfoopou, avfifisfijjxa, owsftyv, (fiatvco) 
 
 to come together, to happen ; ovufiaivsi, it 
 
 befalls, it happens. 
 avpcpogd, dg, ?}, (avficpsgco) a bringing together, 
 
 an event, a calamity. 
 avvaycovi^o^ai, loofxai, (dycovi'Co (lai) to contend 
 
 together with, to aid. 
 dvvavafiodco, 6, ijda, fisfioqxa, (avv, dvd, j3odco) 
 
 to cry out together with. 
 cfvvaviaijftii, (civv, dvd, lajijfu) aijjtico, eaujxa, to 
 
 place up together with ; Mid. to rise up with, 
 GvvaTtodvifcxco, Oavovficu, ridvy-xa, to die to- 
 gether with. 
 avvsidco, avvotda, to be conscious of, to know ; 
 
 Fut. ovveidrjaa from avvsiSsa. 
 ovvrfdeia, as, ?), (<$vv and ijOos, custom) inter- 
 course, association. 
 ovvvopos, ov, 6, 7}, (civv, vsfico, to feed) pasturing 
 
 together. 
 2vgaxovdios, a, ov, Syracusan. 
 avaxiog, ov, 6, rj, (avv, axid, a shadow) shady. 
 ov%v6s, rj, ov, dense, thick, much. 
 GHpaiooeidyjs, iog, ovg, (acpalga, a ball, a sphere) 
 
 spherical. 
 oyaXsgos, d, ov, (a(pdXXco, to cause to reel, to 
 
 deceive) deceitful. 
 
VOCABULARY. 185 
 
 acpdxxa (same as acpaXco), gco, eayaypcu, to slaugh- 
 ter, to stab. 
 
 2Jcply^ yyos, r/, Sphinx. 
 
 6%okd£cd, daco, ((j%ofaj, leisure) to be at leisure, 
 to have leisure for any thing; hence, to devote 
 one's time to, to attend to, to study. 
 
 cfco^o, cfco, aiaaxa, oioco^ai and g£<jg)6{icu, (aas, 
 safe) to save, to deliver. 
 
 JZaxgdxqs, eos ovg, 6, Socrates. 
 
 JZaxgaxixos, 6, the Socratic philosopher. 
 
 aofia, axos, to, a body. 
 
 daxjjg, ijgog, 6, (da^a) a preserver, a deliverer. 
 
 daxrjgta, as, y\, the act of preserving, safety, 
 deliverance. 
 
 dacpgovio, -qaco, (a6(pgcov) to be of sound mind, 
 to be sober. 
 
 aacpgoavvrf, ?/s, ?J, (oacpgav) soundness of mind, 
 sobriety, discretion. 
 
 GGHpgav, ovos, 6, t\, (aas, (pgrjv) of sound mind, 
 sober, temperate, discreet ; Camp, ococpgovi- 
 
 OTSgOS, Sup. GCdCpgOviOTOLTOS. 
 
 xdkavxov, of, to', (xXda) a pair of scales ; weight, 
 that which is weighed, a talent. 
 
 TdvxaXos, ov, 6, Tantalus. 
 
 Tdgxagos, ov, 6, Tartarus, the lowest and dark- 
 est part of the infernal regions. 
 
 xdoaco, |«, xi Ta#a, xixay^iai, to station, to arrange. 
 
 XQtrVgos, ov y 6, a bull. 
 
186 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Td%L6T0S, 7], OV, Slip. (111(1 
 
 Tax'uov and ddaacov or ddxxcov, Comp. from 
 
 ra%vs, eta, v, swift ; as rd/tGia, as quickly as 
 possible, immediately. 
 
 ret/os, sos ovs, to, a wall. 
 
 xsxvov, ov, to, (tlxtco, to bring forth) a child. 
 
 jsXsvidco, v^aco, TSTsXsvT^xa, (rslos, end) to end, 
 to finish ; with ellipsis of $iov, to die. 
 
 jsXsvrij, rjs, i\, an end, death. 
 
 tsXos, sos ovs, to', an end, accomplishment. 
 
 rifivco, TSfico, Tsxp\xa, TtT [irjfxou, Aor. JLct. era- 
 fiov, to cut. 
 
 TSQtjv, siva, rsgsv, (rsgco, jslgco, to rub) rubbed, 
 made smooth ; hence tender, soft, delicate. 
 
 zigyjis, sag, 7/, (rsgnco, to delight) delight, satis- 
 faction. 
 
 ts%vi], jjs, rf 9 (probably from tsxcd, tlxto, akin 
 to tsv/co) art. 
 
 TiOijfii, dijaco, ridsixa, (Oia) to place, to put 
 
 tlxtco, ts^co commonly Ts^ofiai, jsroxa, (rsxco) to 
 bring forth, to produce. 
 
 Tifidco, co, ijdcd, TSTifiijxa, TSTiui^iai, (xiprj) to es- 
 timate, to value, to honor. 
 
 TifjLtj, ijs, 1), (tig) estimation, value, price, honor. 
 
 Tifiios, a, ov, honorable, esteemed. 
 
 Tifccogico, wfico, TSTificognxa, (Tificogog, Tifitj) to aid, 
 to assist, to punish ; Mid. Tif.icdgeof.iai, to aid 
 one's self against any one, to avenge one's 
 self, to punish. 
 
 Tificogia, as, y, succour, vengeance, punishment. 
 
VOCABULARY. 187 
 
 Tivco, TLdco, rhlxa, TSTifiai, (rio) to estimate, to 
 value ; to pay the price of any thing, to ex- 
 piate, to pay a penalty. 
 
 Tig, ti, twos, any one, some one, a certain one. 
 
 its, Ti, TLvog, who? what? 
 
 Titiis, scog, r/, (rico) estimation, valuation; com* 
 monly punishment, revenge. 
 
 TiG>cia(pegvr]s, eog ovg, 6, Tissaphernes, a Persian 
 satrap. 
 
 Toiovrog, touxvt?], joiovTo and toiovtov, (a length- 
 ened form of Tolog) such, such like, 
 
 Toledo, ijca, TEToXfinxa, (toA^oc, iXdco) to bear, 
 to endure, to dare. 
 
 toztqs, ov, 6, a place, a site. 
 
 jgdits'Ca, ??s, ^, a table. 
 
 TQETtCd, VJG), TSZQOCpa, tO tUHl J Mid. TQ£7tO[lCU, to 
 
 turn one's self, to turn intrans. 
 
 TQsepco, dgivjco, ihgocpa, TeOga^fiai, idgicpQ-qv and 
 exgdcpyjv, to nourish. 
 
 J 9^X co i 8gaiiov[xai 9 Sedgd^xa^ s'Sgapov, (dgs(.ia) 
 to run. 
 
 Tgifico, ipcj, T£Tg7<pa, T£Tgi[ii[iou, to rub, to wear 
 away, to beat, to spend ; elliptically, to spend 
 time, to follow any pursuit. 
 
 TgiTJgrjg, eog ovg, tj, (rgcg^ ago, to fit) an Adj. used 
 with ellipsis of vavg, a ship with three benches 
 of oars on each side, a trireme, a galley. 
 
 igkog, 7}, ov, the third. 
 
 rgoitog, ov, 6, (rgsKa) a turning, a mode, man- 
 ner, turn of mind, disposition. 
 
188 VOCABULARY. 
 
 TVTtog, ov, 6, (tvuto) a blow, a mark made by 
 a blow ; hence, a mark, impression, form, fig- 
 ure ; an image, model, pattern. 
 
 tvtctco, ipa, TETvcpa, t£tv[1[jlgu, to strike, to beat. 
 
 Tvgavvtg, idos, ?/, (tvqolvvos) arbitrary power, 
 sovereignty, dominion. 
 
 TvcpXos, r\, ov, blind. 
 
 Tx>xr\, y\s, i}, (iv%<o) chance, fortune. 
 
 r. 
 
 vy'uia, as, 77, (vyirjs) health, soundness. 
 
 vSga, as, ?), a hydra, a water-serpent. 
 
 vdcog, oltos, to, (yco, to make wet, to rain) water. 
 
 vios, ov, 6, a son. 
 
 vTtSQpsysO}]?, eos, 6, 7f, (yrtig, psysdos) exceed- 
 ingly great. 
 
 vitsgogdco, to, oyjofxai, a^iou, vitsgelSov, (vnig, 
 ogdco) to look over, to overlook, to despise. 
 
 vnvos, ov, 6, sleep. 
 
 vmios, a, ov, (yno) bent backwards, laid on the 
 back. 
 
 vorsgaios, a, ov, (varsgos) on the following day. 
 
 vaxsgov, afterwards. 
 
 vvjijXos, ij, ov, (yvjos, height) high, lofty. 
 
 vvjos, eos, to, height. 
 
 0. 
 
 cpaivco, (pava, nlcpa/xa, Aor. tcp-qva, to show, to 
 make to appear ; Mid. (paivopcu, to appear ; 
 Ear. Per/, nicpijva, I have appeared. 
 
VOCABULARY. 189 
 
 (pavsgos, a, ov, manifest, plain. 
 
 (pdgpaxov, ov, to, a medicine, a drug, a poison. 
 
 cpavlos, t\, ov, bad, worthless, vile. 
 
 (pegoo, oiaco, ivrjvo%a, ivrjveypcu, JLor. iiveyxa and 
 
 ijvsyxov, to bear, to bring ; Mid. (pigofjiou, to 
 
 bear one's self, to rush on ; (pigs, come on. 
 (petty a, (psv^ofxai, 7ti(pevya, Aor. l(pvyov, to flee. 
 <pijffl 9 qs> t\<> (ww' 1 ) a sa y m g> report, reputation. 
 (pr^xl, (pr\6(o, Imp, l(pi7v with Aor. signification, 
 
 to say, declare, to affirm. 
 cpOovia, £, 7J(jo, ((pdovos, envy) to envy. 
 (ptXdv6g(07tos, ov, 6, 7), (cpiXos, avdgamos) that 
 
 loves mankind, benevolent, philanthropic. 
 (piXagyvgla, as, i\, (cpikos, dgyvgos) love of 
 
 money, avarice. 
 (pikea, co, i\6(d, rtscplXrjxa, to love. 
 (pikia, as, 71, attachment, love, friendship. 
 <Pi).LTt7ios, ov, 6, Philip. 
 (piXofxaOTJs, ios, 6, 77, ((pckos, pavddvoo) fond of 
 
 learning. 
 (piloTtoveo, co, Tjdco, ((pilos, novos) to love labor, 
 
 to be industrious. 
 (piXonovia, as, -q, love of labor, diligence. 
 (pilonovos, ov, 6, i\, fond of labor, industrious, 
 
 diligent. 
 epilog, ov, 6, a friend. 
 (ptloao(pia, a?, 7), love of wisdom or of an art, 
 
 philosophy. 
 (piX6ao(pog, ov, 6, (cpiXos, 60(pia) a lover of wis- 
 dom, a philosopher. 
 16 
 
190 VOCABULARY. 
 
 (piXovjv%os, ov, 6, 71, (cpttos, ipv/rj) loving life, 
 timid. 
 
 cpXvageco, co, I'ldco, (ipXvagos, cpkvco, to boil over, 
 to bubble) to prate, to talk idly. 
 
 (pofisco, a, feed, 7i8(p6(3i7xa, (cpofios) to terrify ; 
 Mid. (poj3iof.iai, ovfiai, to fear. 
 
 (pofios, ov, 6, (<psftc>, cpefio^at) fear. 
 
 0oivixi7, lis, ii, Phoenicia. 
 
 fpoivi!-, ixos, 6, a Phoenician ; the palm tree ; 
 the fruit of the palm, the date. 
 
 cpondco, a, iJgco, to go back and forth, to fre- 
 quent ; often to go to school. 
 
 &6gxos, ov, 6, Phorcus. 
 
 (pgovtioig, sag, ?/, (cpQovsco) understanding, intel- 
 ligence, prudence. 
 
 <pg6vipos, ov, 6, 7(, {(pgi\v, mind) intelligent, pru- 
 dent. 
 
 cpvXaxij, rjs, i), (cpvldaaco) guarding, watching, a 
 guard, a prison. 
 
 (pvldzico, %co, necpvkaxa, to watch, to guard ; 
 Mid, (pvXdzTouou, to be on one's guard, to 
 beware of. 
 
 (pvatg, sea?, i), (jcpvco) the act of producing, gen- 
 eration, nature. 
 
 (pvco, (pvaa, Tzzcpvy.a, to produce ; Mid. cpvopcu, 
 to spring into existence, to grow ; nicpvxcc 
 and ecpvv, to be by nature, to be constituted. 
 
 fpco'xtcov, covos, 6, Phocion. 
 
 (pavy, rjs, ij, a sound, a voice. 
 
 (pas, (pcoTos, to, light. 
 
VOCABULARY, 191 
 
 X. 
 
 %aiga, %cug?j(jG), K£%dgiixa, K£%dgij[iai, to rejoice. 
 
 %al£7tos, t\, ov, hard, difficult. 
 
 %agd, as, t\, (%aiga) joy. 
 
 %agius, sGcta, ev, (%dgis) graceful, charming, 
 
 elegant, agreeable. 
 %dgis, itos, r\, (%aiga) that which gives delight, 
 
 grace, beauty, a favor. 
 %£tg, y£igos, ?/, a hand. 
 %£igcGzos, t\, ov, Sup. of xaxos, worst. 
 %ijv£Los, a, ov, (%rjv, a goose) pertaining to a 
 
 goose. 
 %it6v, covos, 6, an under garment, a tunic. 
 ygdopai, cofiai, (ygdco) %g?fco[iou, xkygyipai, to 
 
 use. 
 %g£ia, as, ?/, (xgda) need, use. 
 %g£cov, to, (indeclinable) necessity, fate, destiny. 
 '%grfi Impers. it behooves, it is necessary, Lat, 
 
 oportet. 
 %gi}[xa, aios, to, (ygdco) a thing that is used, a 
 
 thing ; PL ygrjfiaja, possessions, treasures. 
 ygjjatfios, 7}, ov, useful. 
 ygovos, ov, 6, time. 
 
 ygvciov, ov, to', and ygvaos, ov, 6, gold. 
 XgvGo^iaXXog, ov, 6, -q, (%gvci6s 9 {laXXos) having 
 
 a golden fleece. 
 ycolos, ?j, ov, lame. 
 %aga, a?, q, a region, a space. 
 ycogko, 6, TJda, x£%6gqxa, to have room, to hold 3 
 
 to give room for, to retire, to go. 
 
192 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ipv^rj, rjs, ?), life, the soul. 
 
 Si. 
 
 as, as. 
 
 coots, so as, so that. 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 Page 28, line 1, for § 61, read § 65. 
 " " « 2, " § 75, " § 79. 
 
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
 
 mi in linn mil 
 
 003 035 533 7 J}'